Raivunthaa Series is Libraiy Science
1 IM>rary movement in India by P N Kauia
2 Gassffied eaudogue code by S R Ranganathan
3 LSurary adnMstratUm by S R Ranganathan
4 Cobm elas^eatioH by S R Rangamrthan
5 Sodat xience research and Ubrarks by S R Ranganathan and
Kumar
6 Library manual by S R Ranganathan
7 Education for leisure by S R Ranganathan
8 Elements of iStray ciassifietukm by S R Ranganathan
9 Beferenee service S R Ranganathan
10 Doeumentatian and its facets, ed by S R Ranganathan
11 Decimal elassifieation and colon dassihcation in oerspeetivp. hy R S Parirhi
12 The five laws of library scknce by S R Ranganathan
13 PunaJhiiliQw yi^yoR Icf Miontta by Umesh Datta Shantna
14 Ubray science today: Ranganathan Festschrift Volume l~Essaysand
felicitations offered to S It Eanganathan on his seventy^st birthday,
ed by P N Kauia (In Press)
15 An essay in personal bibliognphy : Ranganathan Festschrift Volume 11-'
Bibliography of the writings on aid by Dr S R Rai^anathan, ooiiq>i]ed
by A K Das Gupta (In Press)
16 LUwary book selection by S R Ranganathan
17 Library manual (Translation into Hindi by P N Kauia)
Some other books by the author
Anuvaga-sudii-kalpa
Classification and communication
Depth classification
Granthoradhyayanatluhkai
Granthalaya-prtdcriya
Heading and canons
Library development plan
Ubray legislation
Literature fa neoliterates
Organization of libraies
PMosopky of Ubray classification
PidtUe Wwary provision and documentation problems
Rurtd adult education
Social bibUogrtgihy
Social education literatae
Union catalogm of leaned periodical publietaitms in South Ada
CLASSIFIED
CATALOGUE CODE
with additional rules for
Dictionary Catalogue Code
o R RANGANATHAN
Assisted by
A NEELAMEGHAN
Documentation Research and Tndning Centre
Bangalore
ASIA PUBLISHING HOUSE
BCnCBAY • CALCUTTA • NEW DQJBa • MAtatAS
Sbiyali Ranuunrita Ranganathan <189^
Arashanapalai Neeiamegfaan (1927)
SARADA RANGANATHAN ENDOWMENT
FOR LIBRARY SCIENCE
Edition
1
1934
Edition
2
1945
Edition
a
1951
Edition
4
1958
Edition
5
1960
nONTED IN INI»A
BY S. N. aVHA RAY AT SREE SARASWATY PRESS 1X0., 32, ACHARYA
PRAFUIXA OlANDRA ROAD, CAljCUTrA-9 AND FCBUSHED
BY P. S. lAYASINOHE, WBUSOOta HOOSE, BCBffiAY
To the memory of
KRISHNASWAMY RAO
first colleague in Cataloguing
Ute Five Ltxws of Library Science
1 Books are for use
2 Every Reader his book
3 Every book its reader
4 Save the time of the reader
5 A library is a growins organism
CONUHTS
Part A
IntrodoctieB
Clug> Pages
AA Genesis 17
AB Scientific Method 20
AC Aid to Development 23
AD Successive Editions 26
AE Conspectus 29
Part B
Canons of Cataloguing
BA Definition 33
BB Canon of Ascertainability 34
BC Canon of Prepotence 36
BD Canon of Individualisation 40
BE Canon of Sought-Heading 44
BF Canon of Context 47
BG Canon of Pennanence 52
BH Canon of Currency S3
BJ Canon of Consistence 54
Part C
Goieral Nonnative Prind^es
CA Laws of Librafy Science 57
CB Laws of Interpretation 59
7
CONTENTS
Qtap ' Pages
CC Law of Impartiality 61
CD Law of Symmetry 62
CE Law of Parsimony 63
CF Principle of Local Variation 65
CG Principle of Osmosis 71
Part D
Evolution of the Catali^ne
DA Functions of the Catalogue 77
DB Parts of the Library Catalogue 79
DC Right Approach 81
DD Physical Form of the Library Cata-
logue 83
DE Centralised Cataloguing 86
Part E
Recording
EA Language of Entries 91
EB Script of Entries 93
EC Articles and Contractions 95
ED Style of Writing 97
EE Size of Book 105
EF Continued Cards 107
EG Arrangement of Entries in Classified
Part 108
EH Anangement of Efttries in Alpha-
betical Part 1 10
8
CwmNTS
Part F
TondBotosy
Chap
Pages
FA
Work
117
FB
Title
120
FC
Author
123
FD
Collaborator and Sponsor
131
FE
Document
132
FF
Kinds of Documents
134
FG
Preliminary Pages
140
FH
Scries
141
FJ
Related Documents
144
FK
Edition
146
FL
Cataloguer’s Needs
147
FM
Catalogue
155
FN
Entry
158
FP
Classified Catalogue
167
FQ
Sections of Entry
169
FR
Heading
171
FZD
Dictionary Catalogue
177
Part G
Conflict of AnthorsUp
GA
Introduction
181
GB
Person vs Person
182
GC
Person vs Corporate Body
184
GD
Corporate Body vs Corporate Body
187
GE
. Name of Original Author Merged in
Title
193
Part H
Name of Pmon
HA
Introduction
205
HB
Terminology: Simple Name
211
9
CONTENTS
Chap
Paga
HC
Terminology: Compound Name
221
HD
Split Given Name
226
HE
Forms of Name^f-Person
230
HF
Arabic Name
233
HO
Illusion and Solution.
236
Part J
Renderii^ of Nunes
JA
Personal Name
241
JB
Geographical Name
246
JC
Government
251
JD
Institution
259
JE
Conference
263
JF
Title
266
JG
Series
271
JH
Pseudo Series
274
Part K
Class Index Entry
KA
Terminology of Classification
279
KB
Terminology of Chain Procedure
287
KC
Examples of Chain and link
290
KD
Choice of Class Indnc Heading
299
KE
Rendering of Class Index Heading
302
KF
Class Index Entry
305
KG
Exmples of Class Index Entries
308
KH
Classic
314
KJ
Commission Report
318
KK
Homonym in Gass Index Headings
321
KL
Feature Heading
324
KZD
Modifications for Dictionary Cata*
logue
‘10
327
OONXENIS
Part L
Qross Erfmiice bdex Entry
Chap Pages
LA Structure and Types 337
LB Alternative Name Entry 340
LC Variant-Form-of-Word Entry 344
LD Pseudonym-Real'Name Entry 346
LE Editor-of-Series Entry 347
LF Generic-Name Entry 349
Part M
Single-Volumed Simple Book
MA Main Entry: Source 355
MB Main Entry: Sections 357
MC Main Entry: Leading Section 360
MD Main Entry: Heading 361
ME Main Entry: Title Section 369
MF Main Entry: Note 376
MG Main Entry: Accession Number 392
MH Main Entry: Tracing Section 393
MJ Cross Reference Entry 396
MK Book Index Entry 399
< M23> Dictionary Catalogue 408
Part N
Composite Book and Midti-Volnmed Book
NA Ordinary Composite Book 413
NB Artificial Composite Book 421
NC Multi-Volumed Book 425
11
CONTENTS
Part P
Pniodical PnMicatioB
Cht^
Pages
PA
Complexities
433
PB
Simple Periodical Publication
436
PC
, Irregularity in Volume-Number
450
PD
Interrupted Publication
451
PE
Change of Title and Sponsor
455
PF
Amalgamation
460
PG
Splitting Up
465
PH
Supplement
471
PJ
Combination of Complexities
474
PZD
Dictionary Catalogue
479
PZY
Desiderata
483
Part Q
Uoion Catalogue of Books
QA
Coverage
489
QB
Modification in Cataloguing Rules
492
QC
Main Entry
494
QD
Library Number
496
QE
Card for Union Catalogue
499
Part R
Union Catalogue of Periodical Publications
RA
Coverage
503
RB
Users
505
RC
Physical Form
507
RD
Main Entry
508
RE
Other Entries
511
RF
12
Abbreviations
512
CONTENTS
Chap.
Pages
RG
Contractions for Words Denoting
‘Periodical Publication’
515
RH
Contractions of Names of Subjects
518
RJ
Contractions of Geographical Names
and Names of Languages
520
RK
Contractions for General Words
522
RL
T^pogfaphy
525
RM
Lay Out
527
RN
Pagination and Inclusive Captions
530
RP
Card Technique
531
Part S
Natioaal Bibliogra^y
SA
Definition of the National Biblio-
graphy
535
SB
Value and its Implications
537
SC
Physical Form
539
SD
Modification of Cataloguing Rules
540
SE
Main Entry
542
SF
Other Entries
545
SG
Arrangement of Entries in Classified
Part
548
SH
Printed Unit Card
550
SJ
Typography
552
SK
Lay Out
555
SL
* Pagination and Inclusive Captions
559
Part T
lodexii^ Periodical
TA
•
Value of Indexing Periodical
563
TB
Coverage
565
13
CONTENTS
Cfuq>
Pages
TC
Need for Modification of Cataloguing
t
Rules
567
TD
Main Entry
569
TE
Other Entries
571
TF
Classified Index
573
TG
Typography
574
TH
Lay Out
575
TJ
Pagination and Inclusive Captions
576
Part U
Abstracting Periodical
UA
Value of Abstracting Periodical
579
UB
Canons for Abstracting
580
UC
Abstracting Personnel
583
UD
Modification of Cataloguing Rules
585
UE
Main Entry
586
UF
Examples
587
Part V
Incunabula and Non-Book Materials
VA
Kinds of Documents for Considera-
tion
593
Part W
End Matter
WA
Glossary of Terms
597
WB
Bibliographical References
608
WC
Index
613
14
JPjIRT a
INTRODTJCXION
CHAPTER AA
GENESIS
1 Sense of Revolt
The Classilled Catalogue Code owes itself to the sense of revolt'
induced in the mind while learning cataloguing in 1924-25, in the
School of librarianship of the University College in London.
The first cause of revolt was the method of teaching used.
Each rule of the Anglo-American Code was taken by itself, to be
pot into rote-memory as it were. No attempt at answering the
what, the why, or the how of it. No attempt to present the rules
as a system. No attempt at studying an alternative code and
comparing their relative merits. But t^ is necessary to sense the
theory behind the practice. The second cause was the nature of
the Code taught. It was the Anglo-American Code [A3] of 1 908.
Its skeleton nature, its mixing up the author entry and the subject
entry, lack of unity in many of its rules — a serious drawback in the
drafting of a Code— all these added to the result. There was
also a third cause. The volumes of the Classified Catalogue of
the Carnegie Library of Pittsburgh and of the Mitchel Library of
Glasgow were fascinating. Copies of these were available in the
library of the School of Librarianship. But not a word was said
in the class either about Classified Catalogue or about the essential
difference between it and Dictionary Catalogue. A fourth cause
came out of the discrepancy between the rules taught in the
theory class and those prescribed for adoption in the practical
class. Here again, nothing was said or done to satisfy the curio-
sity of students about this difference. Fifthly, the bibliographi-
cal details about format, collation and imprint were over-emphasi-
sed in the practical class. The revolt made one say within onself,
“When I go back home ”
2 Facility for Designing
On going back to Madras, facility of every kind was found to
re-think the cataloguing work.
IW
AA21 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
21 Freedom
In the first place, there was full freedom to do one's best in
re-organisation — open access, classification, cataloguing, re-
ference service, simplified practice in administration, staff
selection, public relation, in fact in every detail in the running of
the library and in building it up.
22 Need for Fresh Catalogue
Secondly, the annual accession soon rose from 500 to 6,000.
Within a year, this choked the paste-down catalogue in book-
form. The necessity to build the catalogue afresh provided the
opportunity to change over to card catalogue. This in its turn
brought in the opportunity to give up the old method of catalogu-
ing, based on the British Museum Code, modified arbitruily here
and there. The working out of a new Code was taken on hand. .
23 Unconventionalised Mind of Readers
Thirdly, much time was spent each day on floor-duty, observing
the classificatory and cataloguing approach of readers to books.
Their approach had not been coloured at all by any tradition, as
most of them tasted library facility — and open access in particular
— ^for the first time in their lives. This gave as good an approxi-
mation as possible to unconventionalised, free, natural mental
behaviour on the part of readers.
24 One Mind in Three Bodies
Fourthly, I was fortunate in the first two colleagues selected by
me — C Sundararo and K M Sivaraman. Both were young
graduates fresh from university. Both were free from any kind
of library tradition in any library technique whatever. Both had
a participating attitude. Both were devoted to their work. Both
were industrious. All the three of us were loyal to one anoth^.
In fact, we three worked together in library field, as if it were a
case of one mind in three bodies. A quantum of Intuition was
bringing out the Colon Classificatiot>and the Classified Catalogue
Code. Intellect was brought into play once a week collectively
cli
GENESIS
AA3
in all the three — ^to discuss, check up, and polish the product of
intuition, in the light of the experience gained by each of the
three during the hours Of floor-duty.
25 Teaching of Cataloguing
Fifthly, a School of Library Science was established in 1929.
Since then, the author had been teaching cataloguing every year.
26 Practice of Cataloguing
Sixthly, about 70,000 volumes were classified, catalogued, and
served during the seven years from 1926 to 1932. During the
last two of these years the Colon Classification occupied the
conscious level. The Classified Catalogue Code was, however,
shaping itself unexpressed, below the conscious level, except
while teaching cataloguing, till 1933 the year of publication of the
Colon classification.
3 First Formulation
After the Colon classification [CIO] came out, the catalogue-
valve between the conscious and the sub-conscious opened out.
The simmering of the Classified Catalogue Code began within the
mind. I had to go to Calcutta. It was a railway journey of 38
hours. I said to Sivaraman, “Put into my bag plenty of 5x3
slips and a few sharpened pencils.’’ During the 20 hows of
daylight in the forward journey and an equal extent of time in the
return journey, the rocking of the train, the utter absence of
distraction by any printed stuff, and the solitude in the railway
compartment, help^ concentration. Un-interrupted recording
of the flow of the rules of the Classified Catalogue Code was the
result. Somek of the rules brought their commentaries in their
train. On return to Madras, these were intellectually reviewed
by all the three of us. These were checked up and polished.
Examples were provided. The press-copy was typed. This
was the developn^t of the First Formulation of this Classified
Catalogue Code.
49
CHAPTER AB
SCIENimC METHOD
1 Endless Spiral
The next stage in the development of the Classified Catalogue
Code was conditioned by the advent of scientific method.
In scientific method, there is a never-ending spiral :
1 From individual experiences, through generalisation, to
empirical laws derived from them, with the aid of induction and
normal equations;
2 Through their reduction to a few normative principles, with
the aid of imagination and/or intuition;
3 Through deductive laws or canons derived from the norma-
tive principles with the aid of methods of inference and
semantics;
4 Through fresh individual experiences not conforming to
them;
5 Back again through another cycle; and
6 So on, without end.
2 Establishment of Cycle
Such a cycle of development has now been established in
cataloguing. Therefore, both the teaching of cataloguing and the
framing of Catalogue Code can have the benefit of normative
principles. New types qf reading materials, apparently trans-
cending the capacity of the existing rules of a ^talogue Code,
may be catalogued by a proper interpretation of its rules. If
this is not adequate, the rules can be amended or extended with
the aid, and as a necessary implication, of the normative
principles. When the cumulated unconscious shift in the social
purpose of the library calls for an altogether different kind of
library service, organisation, and technique, and the current ones
stand abandoned by sheer folk-force, new normative principles
should replace the old ones. And the cycle should ^ started
again [RF9].
AB5
SCIEminC METHCO)
3 Crftiad study of Codes
A critical examination of a Catalogue Code can be made with
the aid of the normative principles. So also can be made a com*
parative study of several Catalogue Codes. Lastly, any Catalogue
Code can be rectified in their light.
4 Verbal Apparatus
The success of critical or comparative study will depend on the
verbal apparatus used to express thought and communicate it.
The verbal apparatus should not create “noise” in the process of
communication. It should not do so even in self*communica-
tion. Grossly disturbing noise is usually caused by the presence
of homonyms and synonyms in the verbal apparatus. Even
more dangerous and virus-like is the subtle difference in the shade
of meaning of a word or phrase, due to slight shift in undertones
and overtones. To minimise this, we should begin any discipline
with the establishment of a special, agreed, dry-as-dust termino-
logy without even the slightest touch of fuzziness. But such a
special terminology will have to begin with some undefined terms.
These should be clearly stated. Again the meta-language with
which we handle the special terminology both at the stage of
definition and at the later stages of development of thought,
should be closely watched, if it is also drawn from the same
natural language as the terminology itself. This is so in the
discipline of cataloguing to-day. The special terminology should
become spontaneous and instantaneous. Its use should be as
much the result of reflex action as that of mother-tongue. This
is an essential factor in scientific method.
5 First Approximatimi
The first application of such a scientific method to Cataloguing
and to Catalogue Code was made in 1937. Between 1934 and
1937 some of the rules of the Classified Catalogue Code came up
for critical examination from time to time, both in class-room
discussion, and in staff-meetings to consider problem-books in
cataloguing. On the anvi],of such critical discussions and as a
necessary aid to them, certain normative principles of cataloguing
21
AB5
CLASSinB> CATAUKJUB CODE
took shape. These were different from the Five Laws of Library
Science. Indeed, they were all implications of these Laws.
They were also diiierent from the normative principles common
to all spheres of human action and thought. The special norma-
tive prindples were called Canons of Catdoguing. These were
the product of impersonal intellectual grind during the prolonged
earlier stages, and of imagination with a touch of intuition at
the difficult final stage. 1 had the unusual privilege of continu-
ously subjecting my Classified Catalogue Code and the other
codes to a severe semantic analysis and check-up in the pure
intellectual plane — ^in the class-room and in staff-meetings. This
helped the formulation of the Canons; and it also led eventually
to the setting up of the scientific method in the Discipline of
Cataloguing. The experience of this first attempt was recorded
in Theory of library catalogue [RTl] in 1937.
CHAPTER AC
AID TO DEVELOPMENT
1 ComparatiTe Study 1
It was late in 1937. The press-copy of the Theory was lying
on the table. T o write or not to write to the Vice-Chancellor for
formal permission to print it — that was the question. A sullen
mood for total withdrawal from intellectual work and retirement
from office was undermining enthusiasm and zest. Natesa
Ananda, a spiritual friend, took me for an all-night vigil. He
counselled persistence in the work on hand. A new spiritual guide
appeared suddenly. He was Purohit Swami. He had considera-
ble experience both before and after enlightenment He had just
then returned from Ireland after spending some years with W B
Yeats. He administered a genial warning. He said, “Salvation
can come only by dogged pursuit of the allotted work in society,
with neither emotional attachment nor revulsion.” This correc-
tive was working in the mental plane for about twenty-four hours.
Then came suddenly a physical aid in the form of a postal packet.
It contained a mimeographed copy of the draft of the Rules for
the preliminary second edition of the Anglo-American Code,
Along with it came also a letter from Rudolph Qjelsness, chair-
man and editor-in-chief of the Catalogue Revision Committee
of the American Library Association. He asked for comments
on the Draft Rules. A few hours were turned on them during
night. Many inconsistencies were seen. Some faults were
detected. But there was no agreed Terminology or Canons of
Cataloguing, in terms of which the comments could be put across
to a far-off cbcrespondent precisely and briefly through a letter.
The new Canons came in handy to make a comparative study of
the draft of the second edition of the Anglo-American Code and
the Classified Catalogue Code. These events, the close sequence
of them, and the advice from spiritual friends at the nick
of time led to a decision to publish the Theory of library
catalogue.
23
AC2 classified cataloolte cchdb
2 Cbmparative Study 2
The Heading and canons [RHl] a second approximation
to the af^lication of Scientific Method to catalo^ng. The
Spiral of Scientific Method having been formed in this field,
this second approximation began with a chapter on Terminology
and another on Normative Principles. Then the several topics
in the Choice and Rendering of Headings were taken up succes-
sively. The corresponding rules in the five chosen codes — the
Anglo-American Code, the Classified Catalogue Code, the Cutter
Code [Cl], the Prussian Instructions [Ol], and the Vatican Code
[S2] — were examined critically and comparatively. This demon-
strated the convenience, if not the need, of having an Interna-
tional Standard for the Title-Page and its Overflow, with special
emphasis on Supplement to Author-Statement. Finally came a
peep into the problems of an International Catalogue Code.
3 Corrective of the Class-Room
The Classified Catalogue Code has been used by me to teach
the subject even from the time it was in the first draft stage. It
is still being used both in teaching theory and in practical catalo-
guing. This is an unusual privilege I have had — to be an author
and at the same time to teach one’s own book to growing minds.
This gave me a great chance to discover the flaws in the book.
Here is a picture of a situation in the class-room. The class as a
whole critically examines the catalogue cards written in the practi-
cal hours. The “accuser” as well as the “accused” student should
cite the appropriate rule from the Classified Catalogue Code in
support of every statement of his. The class-room looks like a
Court of Law. This method of teaching puts the Classified
Catalogue itself “on trial” in this Court. This has happened for
nearly twenty-five years. A few trivial flaws thus come to be
spotted out from time to time. These are removed in the sub-
sequent edition. This is a continuing process.
4 Resilience of Sutra St}'le
The Rules in the very first edition made some approximation
to the Sutra (aphorism) style of expdsition. This style is the
24
AID TO DEm01>MENT
AC4
one used for basic codes and texts in Sansltrit tradition. Ibis
style is «ctremely sensitive to tbe prindple of ^‘atomic unit-
thought” in the ccmstruction of a rule. However, drafting in
English does not allow thorough atomisation. But so far as it
goes, it proves useful in applying the rules to refractory title-pages
with the aid of the Rules of Interpretation. The ruthlessly analy-
tical mesh, holding the rules of the Classified Catalogue Code,
invests the code as a whole with a resilience of another kind.
Books' appear off and on with cataloguing features beyond the
capacity of the existing rules, even with the prop provided by the
Rules of Interpretation. A few books with one or the other of
such new features have come out in recent years. This will continue
for ever. Hitherto, it has been easy to interpolate the necessary
new Rules consistent with the old ones in the right place in the
Code. Three such new Rules have been absorbed by the Classi-
fied Catalogue Code since the first edition came out without any
disturbance to the existing rules. These concern Pseudo-Series,
Related Book, and Merger Book.
CHAPTER ArV
SUCCESSIVE EDITIONS
1 Edition 1
Edition 1 was published in 1934 as volume 4 of the Publication
Series of the Madras Library Association [RC2]. This edition
furnished Uie members of the staff of the Madras University
Library with a firm Code to do their day-to-day cataloguing work
and to make full use of all the entries in the card catalogue in
giving reference service to readers. Perhaps, it happened to be
the first available complete Classified Catalogue Code in printed
■ form. It was pronounced by Sayers to be “by far the largest
contribution to the subject” [SI].
2 Edition 2
In 1938, the Canons of Cataloguing were first enunciated.
These were applied to a critical examination of this Code. The
symbiosis between Classification and Cataloguing was discovered
at the same time. It was brought out by the Chain Procedure
invented at that time to derive Class Index Entry from Class
Number. These ideas were incorporated in the next edition [RC3]
which came out in 1945. The Theory of library catalogue [RT12]
contained also a Theory of Alphabetisation. This theory separa-
ted the “Legislative phase” and the “Executive phase” in alpha-
betisation. This led to the formulation of the Rules for the Style
of Writing and those for Alphabetisation, in close correlation to
one another. This, in its turn, led to the formulation of the
Gestalt Theory of Alphabetisation. Edition 2 incorporated these
new ideas also [RC4].
3 Edition 3
Edition 3 came out in 1951. It included Rules for a Union
Caudogue of Periodical Publications^ [RC7] and Rules for an
Abstracting Periodical [RC8]. This* edition provided also an
26
SUCCESSIVE EDITIONS
ADS
English-Sanskrit CHossary of Cataloguing Terms {RC9] to fonn
the basis for cogn^ ter^nology in the sei«ral Indian langu^es.
This was made possible by the Hindi version of the Code [RZN],
with Rules in Sanskrit Sutras, which was also printed about the
sanmtime.
4 Edition 4
Edition 4 was largely the result of the second round of the
critical study of cataloguing problems embodied in the Heading
and canons (1955). It sought to implement the lay-out for a
catalogue code arrived at in that book. It added the supple-
mentary rules needed in the building of a National Bibliography.
It separated the problems of the determination of the authorship
of a document, the choice of heading, and its rendering, and pres-
cribed the rules for them in independent chapters. It made
some changes in the Style of Writing headings and the corres-
ponding changes in the Rules for Alphabetisation. The correc-
tions suggested in the Heading and canons were incorporated.
This edition further eliminated the need for a separate Dictionary
Catalogue Code. The necessary alternative rules for a Dictionary
Catalogue Code were given in appropriate places in the Classi-
fied Catalogue Code itself. They were only a few.
5 Editions
Ed 5 is different from Ed 4 in certain respects. The difference
concerns the inclusion of the following new chapters and Part:
Chap CD Law of Symmetry;
Chap DD Physical Form;
Chap D£ Centralised Cataloguing;
Chap KI^ Homonym in class Index Headings; and
Chap KL Feature Heading;
Part V Non-Conventional Documents.
In Ed 5, some of the typographical and other trivial mistakes
have been corrected. These concern particularly the internal
reference backwards and forwards, the bibliography, the examples,
and the index. Several sections have been re-worded to secure
27
ADS
CLASSIFIBO CATALOGUE C(»»
unifonnity, or clarity, or simplicity as the case may be. Addi-
tiooal commentaries have been added in. several places. A major
change in Ed 5 is the reorganisation of the Parts and Chapters.
The 9 Parts of Ed 4 have been replaced by 19 Parts in Ed 5. Some
of the longer chapters have been split into shorter chapters.
All this was done to make a closer approximation to the Principle
of Unity in Parts as well as in Chapters.
In this edition, Sri A Neelameghan, my colleague and Reader
in the Documentation Research and Training Centre, has shared
with me the work of revision. His assistance has been of im-
mense help to me.
The work of revising the text of Ed 4 and preparing the press
copy of Ed S has taken about 320 man-hours. This does not
include the time taken by clerical work.
28
CHAPTER AE
CONSPECTUS
The 9 pMts — ^A B C D E F G H and J — constitute the approach,
so to speak. The 10 parts— K LMNPQRST and U — give
the substantive rules for cataloguing.
The 5 chapters of Part A describe the evolution of the Code.
The 9 chapters of Part B expound the Canons of Cataloguing in
the light of which a Catalogue Code should be written as well as
interpreted while applying.
The 7 chapters of Part C deal with the Laws of Library Science,
four general Laws applicable to any situation, two Principles
which throw light on the need for Local Catalogue Codes, and
the Principle of Osmosis by which a library can be reorgani»d
and recatalogued at minimum cost.
The 5 chapters of Part D deal with the evolution of the library
catalogue in its internal form as well as external form and with
Centralised Cataloguing.
The 8 chapters ofPartE deal with the mechanics of catalogu*
ing — such as writing and arranging entries.
The 17 chapters of Part F concern themselves with the establish-
ment of a standard terminology for use in the discipline of
cataloguing.
The 5 chapters of Part G give some help in the determination
of the author of a document, particularly with reference to the
conflict usually arising between the claimants — a Person, a
Corporate Body, a Government, and an Institution.
The 7 chapters of Part H go into the structure of Name-of-
Person in difierent cultural groups. They lay bare the difficulties
in the way of the cataloguers of any one cultural group under-
standing the correct method of rendering the Name-of-Person
in any other cultural group.
The 8 chapters of Part J prescribe the rules for rendering
different kinds of names— personal, geographical, corporate —
and also names of books and series.
The 12 chapters of Part K develop the technique of Chain
A£ CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE COI» ’
Procedure devised in 1938. During the last 25 years tiie advantages
of Chain Procedure are being appreciated all over the world.
Ed S gives the latest version of that procedure.
The 6 chapters of Part L deal with the Cross Iteference Index
Entries to be given in the alphabetical part of the catalogue by way
of linking up alternative headings likely to be sought.
The 11 chapters of Part M form the core of the book. They
lay down strict rules for the writing of the diverse kinds of Specific
Entries for a Single-Volumed Simple Book.
The 3 chapters of Part N give the supplementary rules necessary
in making entries for a Composite Book and a Multi'Volumed
Book.
The 11 chapters of Part P analyse the complexities normally
met in Periodical Publications and provide the additional rules
necessary to write entries for Periodicals with several kinds of
complexities.
The 44 chapters of Parts Q to V give the additional rules neces-
sary in building a Union Catalogue of Books, a Union Catalogue
of Periodical Pubh'cations, a National Bibliography, an Abstract-
ing or Indexing Periodical, and a Catalogue of Non-conven-
tional Documents.
The last chapters of some of the Parts — ^particularly those
giving rules for making entries — ^are devoted to the alternative
rules for a Dictionary Catalogue Code.
^0
PART B
CANONS OF CATALOGUING
CHAPTER BA
DEFINlTldN
0 CuMNtt of CitfilogoiDg.— The spedfic nornutive prmdples
applicable to cataloguing— that is, to the
1 Drafting of a Catalogue Code including the formulation
of each rule ;
2 Intc^retation of the rules to meet new situations brought
op by a particular document or by changes in the practice of bobk
production; and
3 Provision of suitable guidance for cataloguing work.
There are nine Canons of Cataloguing formulated so far. Some of them
were formulated for the first time in the Theory of library mtalogue [RT?].
They were further added to and elaborated in the Heading and canons:
Comparative study of five catalogue codes [RH2]. The Canons are stated
below with brief comments.
A word of explanation about the choice of the term ^Canons* to denote
^Normative Principles’. The following is the convention adopted about the
term to be used to denote normative principles in different contexts:
Law.*— In the context of a major discipline, such as Library Science.
Canon.— In the context of divisions of the first order of the major discipline,
such as Book Selection, Oassification, and Cataloguing.
Principle.— In the context of divisions of the second or later order of the
major discipline, such as Facet Sequence in Classification, and Alphabeti-
sation in Cataloguing.
33
CHAPTER BB
CANON OF ASCERTAINABILITY
«
0 Caam of AsccrtaiBabflity.— The Principle piescribing that
the infonnation found in the title-page of the document catalogued
and its over-flow pa^ should determine the choice and rendering
of
1 Each Section of die Main Entry other than the Extract
Note, the Extraction Note, and the Related Book Note;
2 Each Section of a Cross Reference Entry (in a Classified
Catalogue) and Subject Analytical (in a Dictionary Catalogue)
other than the Leading Section and the Directing Section;
3 The Heading of each Book Index Entry other than any
derived from the Extract Note, Extraction Note, and Related
Book Note;
4 All Sections other than the Heading and the Directing
Section of each Book Index Entry;
5 All Sections other than the Heading and Directing
Section of a Class Index Entry (in a Classified Catalogue), and
Specific Subject Entry, and See also Entry (in a Dictionary
Catalogue);
6 Each Section other than the Directing Section in each
Cross Reference Index Entry other than Name Entry; and
7 Similar sections in any other kind of entry.
1 Internal Inconsistency
Some of the iateraat inconsistencies of existing catalogue codes are trace-
able to their being obliged to step out of the title-page and its over-flow and
go into the market place so to speak, in search of data for the choice and
rendering of headings of even specific entries.
2 Faihire of Tifle-Pag^
Unfortunately, the title-page and its over-flow have not yet begun to give
all the data needed for making the main entry in the catalogue. Nor has
the Cataloguing Profession exerted itself till now in persuading the book-
trade and the authors to do the needful in the matter.
34
CANON OF ASCCRTAINABlLiry BBS
3 Steady Oumge in Title-Pege
It must however be conceded that the design of the title-page and its over*
flow has been in dux all along. During the last one or two centuries sheer
folk-force has led the title-page and |ts over-flow to evolve towards being a
complete repository of the cataloguing elements of a document. Its evolution
has been described in detail in the SocUU bibliography: Physical biblipgraphy
for librarians [RS2]. The title-page is a gift of the early printers. It has Imn
exploited in succession by patrons, publishers, and authors. It is open to
cataloguers too to exploit it. Exploitation here means not only using the
information given in the title-page, but also endeavouring to make the title-
page and its over-flow carry all such information as the cataloguer.needs but
is not at present given in them.
4 Reciprocity
In other words, the influence between the title-page and the Cataloguing
Profession should be reciprocal. Each should enrich and help the other.
To make this possible, the title-leaf and its over-dew leaves in the material
plane and the Canon of Ascertainabiiity in the idea plane — that is, the plane
of normative principles — should be made the sheet-anchor of any Catalogue
Code. The purpose of the commentaries in Sections FL71 to ]l^78 is just
to plead for the establishment of such a reciprocity between the Cataloguing
Profession and the book-trade, leading to the adoption of an International
Standard for the title-page and its over-dow.
5 Main Entry
Even before the desired International Standard for the title-page and its
over-dow is established, the Main Entry can conform to the Canon of
Ascertainabiiity to a large measure. Most of the Book Index Entries also
can do so.
CHAPTER BC
CANON OF PtoOTFNCE
0 Canon of Prepotence.— The principle that
1 The Potency to decide the position of an entry among the
various entries in a catalogue should, if possible, be concentrated
totally in the Leading Section; and even there
2 It should be concentrated, as much as possible, in the
entry element; and further
3 If total concentration in the Leading Section is not
possible, the minimum possible potency should be allowed to
overflow beyond it to later sections; and
4 Even this spill-over should be distributed in the later
sections in a decreasing sequence of intensity.
1 Distribution of Potency
The essence of a Library Catalogue is arrangement of entries. The entries
get sort^ letter by letter or digit by digit, beginning with the very first of
these found in an entry. The potency goes on decreasing rightwards and
downwards, from the first letter or digit, in most of the scripts. Any mistake
in the first letter or the digit will therefore be fatal. The entry will b^ virtually
lost in some far-off region of the catalogue. The range within which the
entry may get lost goes on decreasing, as we move further on from the first
letter or digit. The range is reduced to a reasonably small one, only by the
time we reach beyond the end of the entry word, or of the entry element, or
of the class number, as the case may be.
2 Ll|^ for Framm of Catalogue Code
The Canon of Prepotence yields an important deduced principle applicable
to the choice of entry element in a multi-worded heading—that is, in the
rendering of a multi-worded term chosen for use as heading. That principle
is a statistical one. •
“The entry element should be chosen from among that group of the words,
occurring in the multi-worded term chosen for use as heading, that is more
numerous than the groups of the other words occurring in it.*’
For, the probability for the same word to be used as entry element in several
headings is inversely proportional to the numerousness of the group from
which the word is chosen; and the smaller this probability, the greater will
be concentration of potency in the entry clement. This statistical principle
is responsible— -unconscious though it mii^t have been— for the choice of the
36
CANm tXP PRePOTCNCE BC4
famSy name as the entry element In rendering western name^^f-person in
a heading. It is the overlooking of this statistica] principle that hsa vitiated
the Anglo-American Code’s prescription of place-name as the entry element
for Institution-Heading^ in spite its having accepted the place-name as the
entry element in the name of a Government as improvised by cataloguing
convention [A4]. This statistica] principle plays some part, though again un-
consciously, in the choice of entry element in the real title for title heading,
as prescribed in the Prussian Instructions [02]. This statistical principle
should be exploited fully in the framing of a Catalogue Code. Its use will be
demonstrated in Part J, which is on the Rendering of Names.
21 Illustration From Name of Series
Here is an example of the application of this principle to Series-Heading.
Many universities and governments have established their own series. They
are generally given common names, such as Publication series, Library science
series, English series, Hindi series, Historical series. Economic series. Pamphlet
series, and so on. These names do not have sufficient potency. They often
become homonyms- To resolve the homonym and to increase the potency,
the name of the university or the government or even a department of either
may have to be added. If the purpose be merely individualisation, the name
can be added at the end. But if the purpose is increasing the potency of the
heading, the name should be added at the front. While drafting the Classifkd
Catalogue Code in 1933, 1 had not consciously seized the Canons of Catalogu-
ing. I was therefore unable to decide the issue on proper grounds. Much
of indetcrminancy or inconsistency was the result. It is sixteen years after
the Canons of Cataloguing were enunciated, that 1 was able to sec this difficult
issue lighted up by the Canon of Prepotence.
3 Moral for the Cataloguer
The Cataloguer should prevent any casual error creeping into the Leading
Section and particularly into the first word or the class number — and even
more so the very first letter or digit— to be written at the very beginnirg of
the Leading Section. He must be aware that any error in writing the Entry
Element or the Class Number carries a higli penalty.
4 Call Number Entry
The Canon of Prepotence has its fullest sway in the Call Number Entry
of the Classified Catalogue. Even here, it is able to have its full sway, only
if the Scheme of Classification in use has an individualising Cali Number for
every document. Today, the only scheme that does so is the Colon Classi-
fication [RCl 1 ]. If the Call Number is constnictcd according to that scheme,
the Leading Section of the Main Entry is truly prepotent. All the potency
of the entry, in respect of arrangement of entries, is concentrated in the Lead-
ing Section. Every other section in that entry is rendered impotent. In
finding the position for a Call Number Entry in the catalogue cabinet, the
37
BC4 duASSOFlBD CATALOGUE GCH>E
Filing Cataloguer need never look beyond the Call Number in the Leading
Section.
5 DIctioiiary Catalogiie
In respect of the Canon of Prepotence, the Oassified Catalogue has an
advantage over the Dictionary Catalogue. For, the Main Entry of the latter
is an Author Entry. However much the name of an author may be indi-
vidualised, it may not individualise the document described in the entry.
For, the author might have written two or more documents. Even if ho
has written only two, the entry is not individualised by the name of the author
alone. In other words, the potency is not concentrated in the Leading
Section. A part of it necessarily overflows into the title-section. In finding
the position for the Main Entry in the Catalogue Cabinet of a Dictionary
Catalogue, the Filing Cataloguer will have often to look into the second and
the later secUons.
6 Word Entry
A similar remark is applicable also to any specific word entry, be it of the
Dictionary Catalogue or of the Alphabetical Part of the Classified Catalogue.
In eveiy such entry, every endeavour is made by a Catalogue Code for the
potency to be at its possible maximum in the Leading Section. For exampte,
the name of a person, occupying the Leading Section, is individualised by the
addition of the necessary Individualising Elements to the name. Similarly,
a geographical name in the Leading Section — be it as the name of a subject
or as the name of a Government — is helped to cany the maximum possible
potency, by the addition of the necessary Individualising Elements to the name,
7 Cross Reference Entry
In a Cross Reference Entry of a Classified Catalogue, the Leading Section
has only a little potency. For, it is nwrely a class number. A good deal of
potency necessarily flows into the Third Section, which gives the Locus.
The Filing Cataloguer will have to reach that Section in the Entry.
8 Class Index Entry
The Canon of Prepotence has its full sway in a Class Index Entry of the
Classified Catalogue. For, there cannot be two Class Index Entries with the
same Heading. This is a result of the requirement nhat the artificial
ordinal language of class numbers is expected to be so designed that it has
no synonyms or homonyms [RP2]. In other words, the Heading of a Class
Index Entry individualises the entry. All the potency, in respect of arrange-
ment of entries, of a Qass Index Entry is totally concentrated in its Leading
Section. Its second section containing the directing words and its third
section containing the class number are totally impotent. In finding the
position for a Class Index Entry in the Catalogue Cabinet, the Filing Catalo-
guer need not at all look beyond the Leading Section.
38
CA140N W FREPOUNCE BC9i
91 OroMlUiBram
The Canon of Prepotence is least respected by the Cross Reference Imte
Entry— 4>e it in the Classified Catalogue or in the Dktionary Catalogue.
For, the Filing Cataloguer must look down to the last word in the last secthm
of such an entry to find the correct position of it inXdse catalogue cabtnct*
In other words, the potency, in respect of arrangement of entries, is distri*
bated both in the first and the last sections of a Cross Reference Index Entry.
The Filing Cataloguer will have to reach the Third Section of the Entry.
39
CHAPTER BD
CANON OF INDIVIDUALISATION
0 Canon of Individiialisation. — ^The principle that the name of
any entity— be it of a person, a geographical entity, a corporate
body, a series, a document, a subject, or a language— used as the
Heading of a catalogue entry should be made to denote one and
only one entity, by adding to it the necessary and sufficient number
of Individualising Elements.
1 Fatal Result of Homonym
Homonym may prove fatal. Tragic results have come out of homonyms.
In the epic MaMhdrata the turning point in the Great War centres round
the homonym *"Aswatthama'\ It was the name of a General as well as of an
elephant on the side of one of the belligerents. When the elephant was
killed, the words ‘^Aswatthama killed'* were broadcast by the opposite belli-
gerents. The other side took the name “Aswatthama” to denote their
General. This led to the demoralisation of that side and the ultimate victory
of the other.
2 Homonym Deflects an Author
Homonym may lead to serious results In a scholar's work. A traditional
story, apocryphal though it might be, illustrates it. Sankara, the great
philosopher of mediaeval India, wished to write a commentary on the Sahasra-
norm (book of thousand names) of Lalita (the Goddess-Principle). He
asked his librarian to bring a copy of the Sahasranama, But he brought the
Sahasramma of Vishnu (the God-Principle). According to the tradition,
Sankara ultimately saw the vision of Lalita telling him, *Tt is I that took
advantage of the homonymous nature of the title mentioned by you, and led
your librarian to bring the other Sahasranama, Write* a commentary
on it.”
3 Homonym Spoils Book Selection
Homonym may lead to ridicihous mistakes. Some years ago, the Board
of Studies in Engiish Literature recommended to the Madras University
Library the purchase of a book entitled Life of Johnson, It had taken it to
to be a biography of Samuel Johnson, the well-known man of letters. But
when the book arrived, it turned out to be the life of a dog !
CANON OF INDIVIOUALlSAtlON BD43
4 HoaoHmyn in liid<d0gy
By S Kuppuswamy Saatri
Hie following account of the way in which homonym dissipates research;
potential into trivial work had been furnished by the late Mahamahopadhyaya
Vidya-Vacaspati Professor S Kuppuswamy Sastri, Professor of Sanskrit and
Comparative Philology in the Presidency College and Curator of the Govern*
ment Oriental Manuscripts Library in Madras. It is extracted from a note of
his entitled Authorial polyonymy and homonymy in Sanskrit literature. This
note will be found in full in the first three editions of this book [RC5.]
41 Authorial Homonym in Sanskrit Literature
In Sanskrit Literature, there are several instances of Authorial Homonym
(the same name coining to be given to dilTerent authors).
This phenomenon presents many an interesting problem to the makers and
students of Library Science, in their attempt to formulate the rules of library
classification and cataloguing, not to speak of the various difficulties which
they cause to the modem historians of Sanskrit literature. Homonym com-
prises all the cases where, mainly as a result of the ancient custom of naming
persons after their ancestors, gods, goddesses, prophets, saints, distinguished
authors, patrons and sometimes rulers, different persons have come to bear
the same name. In many of the cases of homonym , it is impossible to discover
exactly all the underlying causes. Homonymous parallels are bound to cause
cataloguing than in the investigation of crimes and settlement of legal claims.
Long-standing usage established by reliable evidence is certainly useful to a
considerable extent in helping one out of difficulties. It would be certainly
worthwhile for any institution intended for the promotion of culture to under-
take the preparation of a concordance to Authorial Homonyms in Indian
literature; and this would afford ample scope for intelligent, inteiesting, and
useful research for a number of scholars for a number of years.
The following illustrations indicate the nature and complexity- of the pro-
blems connected with Authorial Homonym. All the names given below are
such as are expected to find a place in the classification of Indian literature.
42 Vyasa
Vyasa is one ofjlhe most famdhs names in Sanskrit literature. He is the
reputed author of the Mafmbharata. Several Puranas arc attributed to one
with the same name. The famous Bhashya on the Yoga-sutras, called Vyasa-
bhashya^ is also believed to have been written py Vyasa. Some later writers
called Vyasaraya and Vyasa tirtha bore the name Vyasa,
43 Valmikj
Valmiki is the author of the Ramayana, 1 n late r 1 iterat ure, a T amil poet and
a Prakrita grammarian came to be called Valmiki. In recent times, Subba
41
BD43
CLASSIHEd CATALOGUE CODE
Rao, retired Teltiga Fandit of die Presidency College came to be called
Andhra-Valmiki for his Telugu Ramayana.
44 Gautama
Gautama is Uie author of the Nyaya-sutras. The founder of Buddhism^
whose hagiological name is Siddhartha, is also known by his gotrarname^
Gautama. Cataloguers have also to take into account the name Gautama,
borne by the author of an ancient Sutra work of the Dharmasastra literature
iCautama-dharniasutrani),
45 Bad Errors
In library classification and cataloguing, the various problems connected
with authorial Homonym should be carefully and successfully tackled. Other*
wise, bad errors are likely to vitiate the work of higher research. The follm^fing
illustration, in this connection, may not be out of place. Aufrecht, on page
46 of his famous catalogue, confounds Anandatirtha («»Madhavacarya»
Pumaprajna) wiUi Anandagiri (—Anandajnana). The former is the well*
known Acarya of the Dvaita School and the latter is the well-known scholiast
of the Advaita School. This is an instance in which a homonymous part of
two distinct names of two distinct authors has caused trouble.
46 Inadequacy of Mere Names
This illustration will indicate the nature of the snares and pitfalls in the
way of librarians who are engaged in library classification and cataloguing.
The difficulties arising in this way from Authorial Homonymy in Sanskrit
literature have to be surmounted necessarily with the co-operation of scholars
in Sanskrit, until a reliable concordance as indicated at the end of Sec BD41
becomes available, for ready reference. One ^Iden rule, however, which a
librarian, who is concerned with the classification and cataloguing of any
considerable collection of Sanskrit books, can easily remember and follow
is — Refuse to be guided by mere names,^*
5 Dissiiwtion of Research Potential
The unresolved homonyms of the past are dissipating much of the research
potential among the Indologists of the world today. Surely the time and
energy of such eminent scholars could be put to better use, if the bibliographies
and catalogues of the past had respected the Canon oS Individualisation.
Research Potential is also dissipated by the failure of the past to have resolved
homonyms in the titles of books, as and when they appeared.
6 Safeguard the Future
The directive of the Canon of Individualisation is in the words, *‘Sufl5cicnt
is the harm done by neglecting me in the past. Provide safeguards against
its recurrence at least in respect of the headings in the entries of the future
documents. The safeguard is to resolve homonyms in headings by the add!*
42
CANOK OF INDlVlDUALISAtlOH BD43
tioo of extra tenm to the names prop^. CaB them IhdtvIdiiatU^ Ele-
ments.’^ One of the main punKises the plan contained in Sec JPL71 to
PL78 for an International Standard for the Entry Statement for Anilior on
the bade of the title-page of a book is to carry out this directive of the Canon
of Individoalisation. Many of the Rules in the chapters of Part S are tinned
on prescription of Individualising Elements in the rendering of names in
headings of catalogue entries.
43
CHAPTER BE
CANON OF SOUGHT-HEADING
0 Canon of Soo^t-Heading.~The principle that the decision
whether an entry
1 With a imrticular type of heading, or
2 With a particular choice for that heading, or
3 With a particular rendering of that choice, or
4 A particular added entry arising out of it,
should be based on the answer to the question; ‘Ts reader or
library staff likely to look for a book under the particular type or
choice or rendering of heading or in the particuar added entry.”
*'1 Flair and Freedom
(jhe answer to this question is a matter of flair. The flair shield be based
on experience in Reference ServiceVthat is, in eliciting from readers their
requirements and flndlng the appropriate documents for them, (induction
should be applied to the words usually brought up by readers in looking into
the catalogue to choose their documents. The flair should also be based on
experience in Book Selection. Induction should be applied to the types
of heading found necessary to help either in Ailing up gaps in the library
collection or in avoiding unintended duplication^ ^It has to be based further ^
on the obligation of the Reference Section to give a reader alternatives to a
document, when the one actually sought is not in at the moment. The alter-
native may be essentially the same as the one sought. For« tb^ same book
might have appeared with a different title and the latter may bi^in the library.
Or, it might have been merged into another book in the library. Or it
be an extract from some other book, which is on the shelf. Reference Section
will also have the obligation to produce to a reader all the documents associa-
ted with another document mentioned by him. The apparent freedom given
by the Canon of Sought-Heading should be used with great circumspection,
care, and judgement.^
^ 2 Effect on Catalogue Code
(The design of the Catalogue Code is itself largely guided by the Canon of
Sought-Heading. Several of the Rules arc determinded by it^ There are
several elements on the title-page and its over-flow. The Canon of Asccr-
tainability is indifferent as to which element can be allowed the claim to be-
44
CANON Of SOIK>HT«HEA0INO BBl$
come a headu3(g. All that it is concerned with is that(oo element outside the
title-page and its over-flow should be allowed to be^me the heading of a
main en^ or any other entry coming under its 8way)as prescribed in Sec BBO»
(it is the business of the Canon of Sought-Heading to admit or reject^ claim
of any element in the title-page and its over-flow to become a heading. A
trivial case of rejection is the claim of the year or the place of publication or
of the name of the publisher. Author-heading and subject-heading are the
most popular among sought-headings. Collaborator-heading comes next in
popularity. Series heading also is sought.)
3 Pseudo-Series and its Discovery
(rhe concept of Pseudo-Series owes its origin practically to the Canon of
Sought-Heading.) The question '*What are the plays of Shakespeare with
Variorum Edition V* was asked by a scholar. The catalogue based on
the 1934 edition of the Classified catalogue code or any other code current
in that period, could not give an immediate answer to this question. Similar
experiences accumulated through years while doing Reference Service. It
was this that led to the concept of Pseudo-Series.
4 Extract and its Demand
^ f A reader may ask for a document. It may have gone out on loan.) But
an Extract frjjpp it may be on the shelf, as a separate document. There is
some probability for this Extract to satisfy his want. But he will not be able
to look for it under its own heading. Because he may not know of its
existence. Therefore, when he looks for the original book under its own
heading which he knows, he will be helped if there is a note in its entry with
the information portion printed os'* followed by the heading etc of each
of the extracts from it, owned by the library. Vice versa, the reader may
know only of the Extractfy A note in its entry saying ^'Extract from . .
will help him to think of the original. It may be of use to him. He might
not at all have thought of the original. But this note will make him seek it.
This service s^dd be done by the catalogue according to the Canon of
Sought-Heading"'
5 Merger Book and its Demand
Again, it was only in 1953 that(the phenomenon of two or more books
appearing mergedjinto one book at a later time, came to our notice. Here
again the Canon of Sought-Heading prompted the framing of a Rule to meet
the cataloguing problems of such Merger Books.)
6 Cross Reference Index Entry
^he institution of the majority of cross reference index entries had its origin
in the Canon of Sought-Heading) A reader might remember an author or a
collaborator by only one of the names used by him as alternative names or
variant forms of one and the same name, in different documents. Some of
45
BE6 CLASSinCD CATAU)OUS CODS
these (msy be waX and some pseadonymousA This makes no difference In
the problem beitig considered. (Whatever be me name sought by die reader^
the catalogue should inform him of all the documents written by him under
other names too^ The Canon of Sought-Heading recognised this fact. Ah
such names ate proper names. Only a few persons indulge in such alternative
names. The claim of each name to be used as heading may thmfoie be
admitted without undue disregard of the Law of Parsimony. Such is the
verdict of the Omon of Souid^t-Heading.
7 Subject-Heading and Chain Procedure
When the Rules of Chain Procedure were formulated for the first time in
1938 in TJteorjf (RTlOj, the rules were crude. For, practically every significant
digit in the class number was given the right to claim a Class Index Entry
of its own. Far example, in the class number L183, the digit 3 gave the class
index heading **Bar, Medicine.** The digit 8 also gave the class index heading
**Head, Medicine.** Again, the digit 1 too gave the class index heading
‘‘Regional Organ, Medicine**. This was a ruthlessly mechanical way of
deriving class index entries from the digits in class number. It led to a plethora
of class index entries. Some of these were irritating the mind vaguely. The
Law of Parsimony protested. But there was no way of removing the irrita-
tion, till the Canon of Sought-Heading took shape. It ruled out as unsought
the two headings “Head, Medicine,** and “Regional Orgsm, Medicine’*.
Similar weeding out of unsought headings was indicated in many classes.
The Rules of Chain Procedure were themselves re-enunciated. However,
it is the crudeness of the Chain Procedure, invented in 1938, that was respon-
sible for the formulation of the Canon of Sought-Heading in 1952.
7ZD Application to Dictionary Catalogue
During my visit to London in June 1954 for consultation with colleagues
in the profession, A J Wells, the Editor of the British national bibliogrtqfhy^
brought an important experience to notice. While the subject-heading got
by the Rules of Chain Procedure did its work well in the Clawed Catalo^e,
it did nor’pi^i^the ^ in the Dictionary Catalogue. The
discussion of t1^ subject took a fruitful turn as soon as the Canon of Sought-
Heading was consciously taken as guide.
46
CHAPTER BF
CANON OF CONTEXT
0 Caotm of Context.~The principle
1 That the Rules of a Catalogue Code should be formulated
injhe context of:
11 The nature of the cataloguing features of the book»
prevalent in the mode of book production;
12 The nature of the organisation of libraries prevalent
in regard to the mode and quality of library service; and
13 The coming into existence of published bibliographies
and particularly bibliographical periodicals; and
2 That the rules should be amended from time to time to
keep step with changes in the Context.
1 Weightage to Physical Attributes
When manuscripts were loosely assembled sheets, not firmly bound, a
detailed description of size, collation, and even peculiarities of individual
leaves was necessary in catalogue entry. To add to this, each copy of a book
was virtually unique. It was often a rarity. It was property. Each entry
in a catalogue was therefore over-weighted with details of physical biblio-
graphy. This was true as much with Manuscript as with Incunabula. They
are of immense help in historical bibliography. For a long time, after the
invention of printing— even long after the Incunabula Period— these practices
prevailed in some measure. This mental set of the cataloguers of documents
of pre-printing days and of Incunabula days continued even for ages after
the context had changed. Cutter [C2] saw the continuance of this mental
set even down to the last quarter of the nineteenth century. He called it
“full” cataloguing. He recommended “short” cataloguing for Service-
Libraries. This recommendation was opportune; and it was readily accepted
by the progressive members of the profession. Because the great increase
in the annual output of printed books and even in the annual accession in
many a library made “full” too costly for practice. The Canon of Context
gave weight to this change in context. It supported the Law of Parsimony.
And Cataloguing Code was modified. The jurisdiction of the old Code
was confined to the relatively few kinds of catalogues and lists obliged to give
bibliographical description.
2 Back-Log of Incunabiilfi Age
However, the back-log of the old mental set let go the retention of colia-
47
BF2 CLASSIHED CATALOGUE CODE
tion, name of publisher, name of the place of publication, and price in library
catalogue. So long as library organisation put a physical barrier between
reader and library collection, collation served a useful purpose. For, a
reader naturally wanted to know the size of a book before applying for it.
Canon of Context voted for its retention in the then prevailing Context.
Publisher*s name too was somewhat helpful in evaluating a book without
seeing it. But the place of publication and price were hardly relevant to
the needs of either the reader or of the staff. Publisher's catalogue gave this
information. Hie staff had an additional source in tl^ accession register.
These details are necessary in catalogues of publishers and book-sellers,
the accession register, and certain other forms of bibliography such
as a National Bibliography. But they are not necessary in the library
catalogue of a Service-Library. In the long run, they may even amount to
wrong information. In spite of this, the back-log of an earlier context is
still persisting in practice, unmindful of the Canon of Context. This back-log
of the Incunabula Age should not be allowed today to enter the catalogue
of any Service-Library. The Catalogue of a National Central Library, serving
also as the National Bibliography, is the only library catalogue where such
details should be continued.
3 CcHitext of Open Access
A further change has now occurred in the Context. This change lies in
the domain of the organisation of a library. It is the introduction of Open
Access System. Now the barrier between the reader and the book collection
has been removed except in the case of pamphlets, weakly-built books, and
rare or costly books. These form only a fraction of the collection of a
Service-Library. A book within direct access to reader docs not need the
mention of its format, collation etc, in its catalogue entry. The Canon
of Context recommends a device such as that the catalogue should indicate a
pamphlet by a simple device like underlining the book number; similarly it
may indicate an over-size book by over-lining the book number, and so on;
for, books of these kinds arc not given open access. The implication of the
Canon of Context is that, in the entries of any book, other than those to which
open access cannot be given, all items, other than name(s) of author(s), title
with puff omitted, note giving series or certain other peculiarities prescribed
by the Canon of Sought-Heading, call number, and accession number, should
be omitted from the main entry of the catalogue of a Ser/ice-Library. The
Classified Catalogue Code was one of the Erst codes to cut out items other
than the above, quite ruthlessly in a library catalogue. It may however be
added that if centrally-printed catalogue card is used, the Unit Card System
may come into force. It will be printed by the National Central Library,
It will be a reprint from the Main Entry of the National Bibliography. There-
fore, it will have to be allowed to have all the bibliographical details needed
in the National Bibliography. For, it is cheaper to use the same card both
for the National Central Library and for a Service-Library.
48
CANON OT CONTEXT BF5
The Context of Open Access will also reduce annotation to catalogue-
entries to a minimum^ and perhaps even eliminate it.
4 Expectation of Life of a Book
To-day the demand for simplification is reinforced by another factor in the
Context. Books are plentiful and cheap. Only a small percentage have
permanent value. Thus, the preciousness of books as permanent possession
has diminished considerably. Furth^, democracy circulates the library
copy of a book through many hands. Therefore, books perish rapidly by
legitimate use. We have begun to realise that a book is a mortal, though the
work embodied in it may be immortal. Except in a comparatively small
percentage of works which form the classics of permanent value, even the
thought-content of a work is soon out-moded. And in the case of some
works, the thought-content becomes even quite wrong in course of time.
A copy of a book embodying such out-moded and wrong thought-content
may be necessary in a few libraries, in order to serve the interest of historical
and antiquarian research. Perhaps, it should be sufficient to have copies of
such out-moded works in one domiitary library in each country or in each
constituent State, or in a few regions of each country. In a Service-Library,
such books are not only a burden, but they may even be a social danger.
Because, the lower intellectual strata in a democracy may not be able to sense
the erroneousness of the information or the knowledge given in such books.
I usually high-light this new element in the Context by the provocative state-
ment : “The expectation of life of a modem book is only ten years. A Service-
Library hoarding books, over ten years old, is punishable for one or other
of two reasons. Either it has neglected to circulate the book properly as is
evident from its being not worn out sufficiently and reduced to pulp by legiti-
mate use to make its being weeded out a necessity; or it is retaining a book
embodying out-of-date knowledge and exposing it to use by the public.
Either of these is a social danger. If the work as well as the book embodying
it are of fleeting value, there is no harm in weeding the book out in ten
years. If the work is immortal and its body perishes by actual use, one will
have to withdraw it in ten years and replace it by a fresh copy; moreover,
its very lasting value will enable it to come again in a new embodiment.
In that case, it is wiser to replace it by a later edition.*’ We can generally
grant that the span of life of a book of to-day is limited, even though
the work embodied in it may have unlimited span of life. This context
makes one scrutinfese severely the cost of cataloguing. It calls for simp-
lification of catalogue entry. A revision of Catalogue Code becomes
necessary.
5 New Demand in Literature-Search
Intensification and extension of research activity in the community creates
new demands on the catalogue. Over-all economy in the man-power of a
nation calls for a new division of labour. There should be no dissipation of
research-potential. For this, a new division of labour is necessary among
49
BFS CLA^mm catalogue code
the intellectuals. In this new division of labour, the Library Profession should
relieve the other professions of the task of literature-search. The librarian
^ould become a partner in every research enterprise. Moreover, the
tremendous turbtdance in the universe of knowledge of today throws a heavy
burden on the library Profession engaged in literature-search. The search,
moreover, has to be expeditious. To discharge this r)cw function, the Library
Profession has to throw a new burden on the library catalogue. Subject^
analyticals have to be multiplied, in order to bring to the notice of the reader
even micro thought embodied in articles in periodicals and in portions of
books, in the measure of his interest in them. Many libraries have begun
to practise this— particularly research, industrial, commercial, and govern-
mental libraries, and even public libraries.
6 Effect of Intematioiial Bibliograpby
Another change has come in the Context. It has been brought about by
the pressure of the economics of cataloguing service. There is much un»
favourable disproportion between the cost of subject-analyticals and the extent
of their use. However, the social value of even limited use is immense.
A .reconciliation of these two conflicting findings should be found. It has
been found. It is the publication of subject bibliographies as an international
project. This change in the Context does make the Catalogue Code add a
directive that subject-analyticals should not be attempted wholesale by a
Library Catalogue in the fields of knowledge provided ^yith international
bibliographies.
7 Effect of National Docnmientation
But there is an unavoidable time-lag between the appearance of a document
and its mention in international bibliography. This is unavoidable on account
of the problems created by the space to be covered and by the needs of pro-
cessing. During the interval of this time-lag, a Service-Library cannot fail
or fumble about in its literature-search. The failure here is particularly
anti-social. Because, it is nascent micro thought that counts in research.
Here again, the pressure of the economics of cataloguing comes into play.
This pressure too has been removed by a new development coming into
vogue just at this time. A temporary '‘documentation list” is being published
by a nation. For this purpose, nation after nation has begun to establish a
National Documentation Centre. It scans all the periodicals produced in
the country or taken into the country. It classifies the afitiefes. It publishes
a classified list of them week by week. The Context changes with its establish-
ment. The Canon of Context is sensitive to this change. It tells individual
Service-Libraries “Don’t attempt subject-analyticals in duplication of entries
in national documentation lists.” It also tells the National Documentation
Centre, “Remember that your documentation list is only for temporary use.
It will soon be replaced by the fully comprehensive international bibliographies
in the diverse subjects. Don’t waste your resources in making your docu-
mentation list exhaustive. Know what work is in progress in your country.
50
CANON OF CONTCH* BF8
Xndude, in your documentation list» only the title justified by this
Context.*’ \
8 Other CSiaiiges in Context
The world of books is not static. Context is ever-changing. Nature of
book changes. Make up of title-pas^ changes. Nature of readers changes.
Out-look of library service changes. Extent of national and international
co-operation changes. The Canon of Context demands that cataloguing
practice should also change. For this purpose, it demands that Catalogue
Code too should change in consonance with the change in the other factors.
When the standard for Entry Statement for Author, recommended in Sec
FL71 to FL78 comes into vogue, many of the Rules in the current Catalogue
Codes, in regard to the rendering of names of authors, will have to be omitted.
Probably about 60 pages of this code will be replaced by a Rule of a few lines.
(See Rule Cl). Several others will have to be changed. New ones will have
to be added.
The refrain of the Canon of Context in its application to Library Catalogue
and to Library Catalogue Code is:
Ever becoming, ever new.
51^ !T!ft I
51
CHAPTER BG
CANON OF PERMANENCE
0 Canon of Pennanence.— The principle that no element in an
entry, the heading in particular, should be subjected to change by
the Rules of a Catalogue Code, except when the Rules themselves
are changed in response to the Canon of Context.
The Canon of Pennanence and the Canon of AscertainabDity work in
unison. Alternative names are left to the care of Cross Reference Index
Entries. Change of name of a person or of a corporate body is not allowed
to ask for a change in the Heading of any entry of any book published under
the old name. The Classified Catalogue Code has framed its Rules on the
cataloguing of periodical publications, for the first time, in such a way that
the Canon of Permanence in cataloguing and the Canon for Filiatory Sequence
[RC6J in classification are both respected simultaneously.
52
CHAPTER BH
CANON OF CURRENCY
0 CunoQ of Currency.— The principle that the term used to
denote a subject in a Class Index Entry of a Classified Catalogue
and in a Subject Entry of a Dictionary Catalogue should be the
one in current usage.
1 Conflict Canons
Name of subject keeps changing widi time. Unless the current name is
used in the heading, readers cannot benefit by it. To satisfy this Canon,
the headings of Class Index Entries and of Subject Entries idiould be changed
as and when a new name stabilises itself. This leads inevitably to a violation
of the Canon of Permanence. This conflict between the two Canons is
resolved by a partition of the field of sway. The Canon of Cvmncy has
sway only over Class Index Heading in Classified Catalogue and over Subject*
Heading in Dictionary Catalogue. The Canon of Permanence has sway only
over Name-Heading other than Subject-Heading. It has sway only in a
heading made of name of person, geographical entity, or corporate body.
2 Dilemma
The Canon of Currency has to face a dilemma. The question is, “Current
among whom ?“ For, two different terms may be current at the same time
among specialists and non-specialists to denote one and the same subject.
The first belongs to the special terminology built up by the specialists them-
selves. The second belongs to the natural language spoken by the common
man. The general tendency is to prefer the term in natural language. This
preference often leads to a multi-worded term in natural language in pre-
ference to a single-worded term in specialist language, e g, “Child, Medicine*’
in preference to **Pediatrics“. In spite of the increase in the number of
words to be used, natural language is preferred. This is due to the pressure
of the Second Law of Library Science [RF3]. According to it, a specialist
reader knows thetommon name as well as the technical name of a subject.
The non-specialist reader knows only the common name; he does not know
the technical name. Moreover, the specialist has a highly organised perso-
nality; he has greater intellectual awareness and agility. If he does not find
a technical name in the headings, he will look up its popular equivalent.
It is not so with the common reader. Therefore, to serve every reader without
exception, common name should be preferred to special terminology, in
Subject Heading. This is the joint finding of the Canon of Currency and the
Second Law of Library Science as a helpful way of getting out of the dilemma*
53
CHAPTER BJ
' CANON OF CONSISTENCE
0 Canon df Consistence.— The principle that
1 The rales of a Catalogue Code should provide for all
the added entries of a document to be consistent with its Main
Entry; and
2 The entries of all documents should be consistent with
one another in certain essentials such as choice, rendering, and
style of writing the heading and the other sections.
The Canon of Consistence does insist that the Main Entry of all documents
should be of the same species. For example, in a Dictionary Catalogue
the main entry should be an Author Entry in ail cases. It should not be a
Subject Entry.
We should not make one species of entry take the place of another. Again
a catalogue code should not prescribe for the heading of one and the same
entry, Main Heading and Sub*Heading of different species, such as Author
Heading and Subject Sub-Heading. But this canon is violated by some of the
Rules of the Anglo-American Code, as shown in the Heading and canons
[RH3],
54
PART C
GENERAL NORMATIVE PRINCIPLES
CHAPTER CA
LAWS OF UBRARY SCIENCE
0 Laws of LOnrary Science.— The spedlic normative principles
applicable to any problem arising in library science, library
service, and library practice.
1 First Law:— Books are for Use.
2 Second Law: — ^Every Reader His Book.
3 Third Law:— Every Book Its Reader.
4 Fourth Law: — Save the Time of the Reader.
41 Corrollary to the Fourth Law:— Save the Time of the Staff.
5 Fifth Law Library is a Growing Organism.
1 Fundamental Laws
There are Five Laws of Library Science formulated so far. They were first
formulated in Madras in 1928. In 1931, they were first published in a book
[RFl] along with an exposition of their implications.
These Laws are the Fundamental Laws of Library Science. These form
the Normative Principles containing in a latent form all the library practices
current at any time and to be evolved at a later time. A new chapter in its
second edition [RF8] published in 1957 shows how some of its implications
not current in library practice a quarter of a century ago, have now become
current to suit the boundary conditions of Library Service set up by the
pressure of the social concepts of to-day. In particular, the term "*Book*’
should be generalised in the present-day context to mean a "^Document”
as defined and elaborated in the Rules of Chap FE.
2 Final Court of Appeal
The Canons of Cataloguing given in Part B are all implications of the
Five Laws, specific to the sphere of cataloguing. If any conflict arises betwe^
the Canons, it is resolved by an appeal to the Five Laws. If a cataloguing
problem exceeds the capacity of the Canons, an appeal is made to the Five
Laws to suggest a solution. But we do not invoke the Five Laws on the
occasions in which the Canons can manage the situation. The Five Laws
are like the Head of a State, in whose name and on whose authority, every
government action is done by the ministers and the secretaries, without his
explicit and immediate intervention. The Five Laws are like Lord Namyana,
resting in his fiowery float on the Ocean of Milk,— ever-watchful and ever-alert,
but abstaining from visible intervention except when the laws of the universe
are over-powered by the happenings in the universe not anticipated by them,
57
CA3 CLASSIFIK) CATALOGUE CODE
S Agency fof ConiiNromiee
It occasionafiy happens that the Canons of Cataloguing come into conflict
with certain general Normative Principles, such as those given in the later
Chapters of this Part. On such occasions, a compromise is elliscted in the
light, and with the aid, of the Five Laws of Library Science.
58
CHAPTER CB
LAWS OF INTERPRETATION
0 Laws of Interpretatioii.— The well-known principles of inter*
pretation, such as the 1,008 principles of interpretation listed in the
Nyaya-kosa [Jl],
1 AppUcati<« to Cataloaue Code
These principles have been evolved to a remarkable extent by the philo-
sophers of the Purva-Mimamsa and the Nyaya Schools of Indian philosophy.
In law too, such principles are applied necessarily. A Catalogue Code is
like a legal document. Any Rule in it should be interpreted like a legal text.
For example, there may be conflict between one Rule and another. In actual
application, the conflict should be resolved with the aid of the Laws of Inter-
pretation. A new cataloguing problem created by a document may have to
be met by a proper interpretation of the Rules in the Catalogue Code. Periodi-
cally, the Rules should be amended ig the light of experience, so as to remove
conflicts or at least to reduce them to a minimum, if they could not be totally
removed. It is the application of the Laws of Interpretation that led to a
revision of the definition of Composite Book and to the concept of Pseudo-
Series. One of the Laws of Interpretation is called “Lost-horse, Burnt-
chariot** Principle. Its application in the held of classification occurs in the
article Classification of allusion books [RZS].
2 Resolution of Conflict
There is often conflict between the Law of Parsimony, the Laws of Library
Science, and the Canons of Cataloguing. The conflict has to be removed
quite often with the aid of the Laws of Interpretation. One of the Laws of
Interpretation, for example, is this: The claim of the normative principles
special to the business on hand — cataloguing, in this case — should be given
greater weightage than a normative principle of general application— say, a
Law of Library Science. Conflict may arise between one Law of Library
Science and another in framing a particular Rule in Catalogue Code. The
Fifth Law— Librarjws a Growing Organism — often sides the Law of Parsimony
and gets into conflict with the other Laws of Library Science. If possible,
a compromise has to be arrived at in every such case of conflict. If a com-
promise is not at all possible the principle of “the later the law, the greater
its weightage*’ is applied.
3 Subject for Thesis
It has been an unfulfliled ambition to scrutinise the entire Classifled Cata-
logue Code from the angle of the Laws of Interpretation. My friend Maha-
.59
CB3 CLASSIFIBD CATALOGUE CODE
mahopadhyaya Professor S Kuppuswamy Sastry was an eminent speciaHst
in the subject. He and myself had intended to t^e up such a scrutiny of the
Classified Catalogue Code, after both of us would retire from the salary*
earning stage of life. But, alas, he died before 1 could retire. I then soufibt
to do the work in collaboration with a student of his. But it did not mature.
The application of the Laws of Interpretation to the Classified Catalogue Code
will be an eminent subject for investigation by an aspirant to a Doctorate in
Library Science.
60
CHAPTER CC
LAW OF IMPARTIALITY
0 Law of Impartiality. — The principle that between two or
more claimants — say, for use as heading — ^the preference of
any one should be made only on sufficient grounds, and not
arbitrarily.
1 Joint AuUiorslilp
For example, in the case of joint authorship, the Law of Impartiality would
recommend equal right to the names of all the authors for choice as heading.
2 Multiple Series
Again, a book may belong to more than one publisher’s series. The Law
of Impartiality would recommend equal right to each of the series to have a
note devoted to itself. Further, as a consequence of this, this Law would
recommend equal right to the names of each of the series for choice as heading
for a book index entry of its own. (See Examples 1 to S in Sec MK232).
3 Locus Statement
Here is another example. The locus of a micro document has to be given
both in the case of a Cross Reference Entry and of an entry in indexing or
abstracting periodical. The locus consists of the name of a host document
and often also of the exact part, chapter, section or page of occurence in the
host document. The punctuation marks to be used in the locus section should
be along similar lines in tlic case of either class of entry according to the
Law of Impartiality.
61
CHAPTER CD
LAW OF SYMMETRY
0 Law of Symmetry.—The principle that of two entities or
situations which admit of being regarded as symmetrical counter*^
parts of each other, if one of the entities or the situations is given
weight in any particular context, the other entity or situation
should also be given a corresponding weight.
1 Joint Attthorsliip
For Example: Let us consider a book of two joint authors. In the heading
of the main entry, we are obliged to write Jhe names of the two authors in
the sequence in which they occur on the title page. As a result of this, there
will be a book index entry using as heading the names of the two authors in
the same sequence. But considerations of symmetry would make us write
another book index entry using the names of the two authors in the reverse
sequence.' (See examples 7 and 8 in Sec MK 21 1).
2 Concurrent Prescription
In this type of cases, the prescription of the Law of Symmetry is concur-
rent with the prescription of the Canon of SoughMIeading formulated in
Chap BE. The difference between the Law of Impartiality and the Law of
Symmetry is somewhat subtle. A little thought will however show that they
are not identical.
3 Conflict with Law of Parsimony
Conflict may arise often between the Law of Impartiality and the Law of
Symmetry on the one side and the Law of Parsimony on the other. It will
require a considerable judgement to resolve the conflict in actual cataloguing
work.
62
CHAPTER CE
LAW OF PARSIMONY
0 Law of Pardmony.— The principle that between two or more
possible alternative rules bearing on a particular phenomenon, the
one, leading to ov^all economy of man-power, material, money,
and time considered together with proper weightage, is to
prderred.
1 Sobering the Chain Procedure
The sobering effect of the Law of Parsimony of the Chain Procedure has
been described in Sec BE7.
2 Pruning According to Context
The Alternative-Name Entries* the special notes in the Main Entry and
their Associated Added Entries, the Cross Reference Entries in a Classified
Catalogue, the Subject-Analyticals in a Dictionary Catalogue, the Class
Index Entries in a Classified Catalogue and the See also Subject Entries in a
Dictionary Catalogue promoted by the Canon of Sought-Heading, may swell
to disproportionate dimensions, unless the answer to the question, ‘Ts it
truly a Sought-Entry V is considered with great care. The Law of Parsimony
would ask for considerable pruning. This pruning can be done to an appreci-
able extent with the aid of the Canon of Context explained in Chap BF and
its commentaries.
3 Printed vs Written Card
The Law of Parsimony would make a fundamental difference in the Rules
about Specific Added Entries, according as the catalogue card is printed
or machine duplicated, or typed (or hand-written). In the former case, it
would recommend the Unit-Card-System. In this, a copy of the Main Entry
Card itself would be used as any Specific Added Entry Card, by merely insert-
ing in the Leading Section the heading of the Added Entry. For this purpose,
the first line of th# printed card should be left vacant. On the other hand,
if the catalogue card is typed or hand-written, the Law of Parsimony would
recommend a Multiple-Card-System. In this, each Added Entry would
have only the minimum information necessary to satisfy the Canon of Context.^
To achieve this, the Law of Parsimony would allow a number of additional
Rules in the Catalogue Code to take care of the different kinds of Added
Entries. Such additional Rules for Specific Added Entries would prescribe
omission of Series Note and Accession Number, shortening of Title, and
shortening of every other category not acting as a link between a Specific
63
CE3 CXAIKipPIED CATALOGUE CODE
Added Butty aiid its Main Entry. Ifot emmide. in fla CTauM^ r>*«try^/'
Rules would inovide for the omission, in the Second Se^on of «
Added Entry, of the Individualising Etemmts added to tibe Author’s Name
in the Heading of the Main Entry.
64
CHAPTER CF
PRINCIPLE OF LOCAL VARIATION
0 Prindple of Local Variation. —The principle that ^
1 The International Catalogue Code should mark out
factors to be left to the care ot each National Catalogue Code;
2 A National Catalogue Code should mark out the factoit
to be left to the care of each Linguistic Catalogue Code in a multi«>
lingual country such as India;
3 A National Catalogue Code or a Linguistic CatalogtH)i
Code, as the case may be, should mark out the factors, to be left
to the care of the Local Catalogue Code of each individual library;
4 The Catalogue Codes in each hierarchical line should be
consistent with one another without any mutual contradiction; and
5 Each lower link in each hierarchical line should be a
Supplement to all the upper links taken together.
1 Intimacy Inherent in Service
Catalogue is a tool f^r a reader to find out his requirement in the library.
It is an important tool in library service. Intimacy characterises service.
Intimacy underlines the individuating particularities in the reader-library
setting. The catalogue is a medium of communication in this intimate setting.
Thus, local colour should be inherent in library catalogue. A library , catgut
logue does have to conform to a pattern conceivable in abstract. The pattern
should also be prescribed in abstract. But to invest it with the intimacy
Inherent in service, it should be impressed with the essential local colour.
This is the message of the Principle of Local Variation. This local colour
to be assumed by the library catalogue in successive stages. Three or four^
stages are unmistakable — ^International, National, Linguistic, and Local.
Corresponding to each stage there should be a different catalogue cotfe,
consistent with the code corresponding to each of the earlier stages. The
International ( atalogue Code gives only a general blue print, as it were.
2 Languages and Their Reconciliation ,
Difference in language will be the first point of deviation from the Inter*
national Code. It has been shown in Library catalogue: Fundamentals and
procedure that the Language of the Heading in a Catalogue Entry is an aiti*
ficial language [RL5]. Its syntax is different from that of any Natural
Language. It generally admits of nouns only,— with the exception thqt. \\h •
a language has no single word to denote an ^
«7
5
OASmm CATAU)OUB CODE
cp4
Imve to admit a nemo qmdified by an adiective— as for example^ **DiMtive
to denote the functional organ concerned. Again the nouns in tiite
ifaading should be in the notninadve case. But the title-page in some of the
languages such as Sanskrit and Russian give the names of authors and col-
lahorators in the instrumental case. Therefore the Lingoistlc Catalogue
Code in such a language should give an appropriate note under Sec
The punctuation system of the artificial language of Headings is also artificial,
linguistic Variation should be allowed in respect of punctuation.
3 Style of Writliig and Prints
The style of writing or printing the elements in a catalogue entry depends
on the script and the type-faces available. For example, Roman character
admits of upper case, lower case, and italics) It admits also of antique face
and small capitals. Even when written by hand, it is possible to have cor-
responding varieties. ""pBut many of the Indian characters do not admit of all
of them. As it is to-day, we have to have recourse only to white and black,
and variation of matra (size). ]^e International Catalogue Code should
therefore deal with style, only in g^ral terms— of dominance, subordination,
and the like. The actual method of implementing these prescriptions will
have to be stated only in a National Catalogue Code or a Linguistic Catalogue
Code as the case may be;\ The importance and inevitability of a Linguistic
Code providing its own s^ification for the style of writing was realised in
a compelling way while compiling a Tamil Bibliography [RZM]. In this
sense, either of these has to fill up some details in the blue print sketched by
the International Catalogue Code. Thus the Principle of Local Variatioii
has sway over this problem.
4 ArrangeiBent of Entries
The arrangement of word-entries is intimately bound up with the style of
writing and printing, At any rate, it is desirable that they should be so lx>und
up. . ' As the Rules on the Style of Writing and Printing have to be left to the
care of a National Catalogue Code or Linguistic Catalogue Code, the Rtileq
on the Arrangement of Word-Entries should also be left to its care. Thus,
the Principle of Local Variation )ias sway over this problem.
5 Rendering of Personal Names
|At present, certain National Catalogue Codes claiming international status
presume competence to prescribe rules for the rendering, irt heading, of a
Name-of-Person of any culture whatever. This is attempting the impossible.
Considerable research awaits to be done to delimit the boundary of the
International Catalogue Code in this respect.) The first step in this direction
was taken by Unesco through its International Advisory Committee on
Bibliography in 1952. In 1951, the Indian Library Association and the
Indian National Commission for Unesco accepted a resolution of mine to
Unesco to make the rendering of Asian names the subject of one of
' • 1 -^-niects. This wqs.dope. The task was in the end en-
64
imCNC^tfi Of t^OCAL
truflM to n»* Tbk gftve me an o{^;)ortiiiiity to ftoe the profalejn s^nateiy,
Itetdet^ of this UoMco Project are giveo in Sec Meetings
with several cultural grenips slowly allowed some awareness to dawn on the
preMem. Some streak oflight has fallen on tlie problem.
51 Entry EtaoHnit
was the Canon of Ftepotenoe that let the li^t in . A modem Nameof*
Person has many words. The potency from the ankle of arrangement is not
eduahy incident on all the wor^. In many names> it is greatest on one
Oenerally speaking, a prepotent word in the name can be found,
an appreciable number of fases, potency is concentrated most, not
on one word, but on a doublet— that iston two words*^ fSometiines it is
$0^ over even three words^ QVhether a smgle word is prepotent or a double
or a treble word is prepotent; it is obvious only to a native of the country to
^ch the name belongs] An alien cataloguer cannot ordinarily 'bcqulxe
sufficient competence in this matter. Even if a persevering cat^oguer is
enterprising enough to master alien names, it is doubtful if he can do it for
all the foreign cultural groups. If he attempts to do it, he will become a
specialist in cultural sociology at the cost of his loyalty and duty to the library
Profession in general and the Cataloguing Profession in particular. Our
experience with such cultural-cum-linguistic specialists, functioning as cata-
loguers, confirms this fear. For, by the sheer impossibility of doing two
things at one time, they are found to be naturally un^informed about current
progress in the discipline of cataloguing and about the great changes coming
over library service in our own days. They even show a tendency towards
bigotry which denies even the very existence of Library Science and the
Discipline of Cataloguing. A step in the right direction appears to be to
entrust the problem of “single-worded or multi-worded entry element*’ to
the care of me respective National or Linguistic Catalogue Codes. It is the
' 4uty of each National or Linguistic Catalogue Code to devise a method by
^^'Which the singleness or multiplcness of the entry element could be mechani-
.saHy found out by a cataloguer of an alien culture. The most obvious
me^od will be to append to the "^^ational Catalogue Code schedules of multi-
worded entry elements, assumib^ that these are fewer in the cultural group
concerned than the single-worded entry elements. Thwe may be less cumber-
some methods available in certain cultural groups. For example, while
discussing this problem with Sinhalese scholars in Ceylon, the concept of
“Starter Word” emerged. By a “Starter Word” is meant a word which is the
first of a mUlti-worded entry element. The other words are found to be con-
secutive to the Starter Word, exactly as they occur in the full name as it is
uttered or printed on title-page. Perhaps a reprint of such national schedules
may be separately issued for use by other national groups,
6 Script and Transliteratioii
I
^ Headings in many catalogue entries are proper names. They are names df
pmois, geographical entities, or corporate bodies. They do not
€f
word.)
'tilJ^aSIED CATALOGUE CCHSS
tran^tkm* Fcv tihey aie terms of eKtensi<m« they are not expressive
Whatever be the script used in a catalogue entry* the heading should
the i»roper name phonetically. This indicates transliteration.^ All tibe letters
of one script do not have phonetic equivalents in another script. Ihereforh*
transliteration U not a simple z^air.) Till now, the Roman script has bes<ni
lar^y pla^g the part of the host4cript. This has been due to historical
circumstances. For, the renaissance phase of the present cultural cycle ap*
peared in areas of Roman script a few centuries earlier than in areas of any
other script; Therefore, during the last few centuries, transliteration had
virtually meant transli^ration into Roman script. This has become such
a rigid part of the mental set of the cataloguers of the West that the reverse
movement of transliteration seems to have very little chance to be recognised,
even at international level. This is again due to a historical factor. For,
international bodiejyiave been all along effectively confined to the memberw
ship of the West, ^^erefore, the idea produced by reflex action, on hearing
the term transliterati^, is that of the Roman script as the host-script. Ther^
fore, the so-called international Catalogue Codes provide only^for one-way
transliteration.^ This is a violence to the Principle of Local Variation. The
newly awakening countries have much to do to remove this violence. In
my recent experi^ice with the Unesco Project on the Rendering of Asian
Names, 1 had found this mental set in the Librarians of the West too rigid
to be broken. They cannot dissociate transliteration from rendering. Nor
do they see the reciprocal feature of transliteration. For them. Rendering
of Asian Names is mostly transliteration in Roman script. This is a vexa-
tious barrier 1 had met with In many international meetings. The West
should become a little more aware of the “whole problem**. Perhaps it is
due to the viscosity of the mental set created in the years of Western domi-
nance that the Indian National Bibliography contemplated the adoption , of
Roman script. May better sense dawn upon those responsible for this I
7 Analytical Entry
The extent of the putting in of subject analyticals and author analyticals is
subject to Local Variation of a narrower variety. This is bound to vary from
library to library. Therefore a National or an International Catalogue Code
should make the rules on such entries permissive, and not compulsory^ The
Supplementary Catalogue Code of a library should have rules defining their
permissible extent in more rigid terms. For example, a library in ludia^
need not give analytical entries for essays in English, there is the JSssay
index of Wilson and Co. But it should give analytical entries for essays in
Indian languages, until an Essay index comes to be published for them.
8 Fleeting Material
In a governmental library and in the library of a business body or an acade*
mic institution, a large and even exhaustive collection may have to be made
from time to time, in connection with a particular problem engaging attention
at the moment. After the problem is disposed of, the collection may not have
68
m
PRimFLB 01? tOCAL VARlAllbN CBS
useiii tlie Itbraiy. A few yeais ago, ^ libmty of the United Katloi^ bad
to anuias considerable mat^t on the Palestine Probim. After ^ settle*
me^ of die i»rob]ein» that library could not afford to continue to keep on its
shelves the entire load. Such materials have only a limited period of use.
We shall therefore denote them by the term ‘‘Fleeting Material**. The
duration of the accession as well as of the use of fleeting material may be too
small to complete their cataloguing except by putting an enormous strength
of temporary staff on it. And yet, it will all amount to a waste after a short
while. The Canon of Local Variation would allow such Fleetmg Materials
to be merely shelf-listed; perhaps even this would be too much in some cases.
It will be sufficient merely to arrange them on the shelves and deem them to
stand **self-catalogued^’ so to speak. This was, for example, enunciated
as follows by the United Nations International Committee of Libraiy Experts
which went into ‘*the kinds of library service required by the United Nations
and the methods by which such service can be most effectively provided,’*
during its meeting from 2 to 9 August 1948. I was a member of that Com-
mittee. And I had to stress hard this point of Local Variation and Fleeting
Materials. This was because I had seen mad proposals of librarians in India
that every scrap of printed paper coming into the library had an absolute
claim to a share of the cataloguing time of the library. Lay-managements
are often misguided into this absurd insistence. The document Library
services of the United Nations (Ul) gives the recommendation of the Inter-
national Committee in the following terms :
“No attempt should be made to build up the collections for purposes of
general historical research beyond the needs of the United Nations. . . .
The library should be free to provide more summary treatment for much of
its material and in some categories may omit cataloguing altogether.’*
91 Selective Cataloguing
^ iEven in other kinds of libraries, the Principle of Local Variation will
presortbe Selective Cataloguing. Materials used only occasionally may have
to stand on the shelves or in vertical files, “self-catalogued”. For example,
my advice to the Central Secretariat Library in New Delhi was that such a
treatment might be given to the large mass of annual reports and similar
documents of various governments including those of the United Nations,
^ accumulated for years in that library. Ignorance of this has led to the wastage
of the meagre library fund in certain places and to other kinds of havoc
in other places. At the same time, they should be properly classified and
catalogued in a research library, such as that of the Gokhale Institute,
where they form the very basis of much of the work in the Institute.
92 Diffmntial Rules
(pother application of the Principle of Local Variation is the freedom
given to an individual- library or to a Local Catalogue Code to cut down
details rigorously for entries of certain kinds of materials.! The Prussian
CP92 isuimm cATAwam <xm
instm^im (0$ gives tiie foQowixig Hsi of calegories of doetuneius wlm
the applic8lio& of sc^^ve cataloguing may be allovined in public rdfeime
libraries;
1 Manuals for schools or sdfoducation;
2 Guides for elementary knowledge including books on sports,^
3 Materials on domestic economy lacking scientific intmst;
4 Popular informative books, especially in science, medicine and law;
5 Instructions for non-commissioned officers and privates;
6 Books d superstitious and occult content (!);
7 Light reading materials and songs for social purposes;
8 Juvenile and picture books;
9 Prayer and devotional books;
10 Minor works of local interest such as reports on festivities, exhibition
catalogues etc.
For these books, added entries are almost omitted, various editions are
combined on the same card and various other simplifications are made.
Again, cataloguing may have to be done to different degrees of fullness for
different categories of materials. Mere shelf-listing may be sufficient for
some. At the other extreme, for Incunabula, for instance, detailed biblio-
graphical cataloguing is necessary. A Local Catalogue Code must have free-
dom to adopt Differential Rules for different groups of materials. The
Principle of Local Variation will call for all degrees of play of Selective
Cataloguing.
93 Areas for Variation
There is need for a hierarchy of catalogue codes, from the International
Code, through Regional and National Code, through Linguistic Code,
to Local Code. There are limitations in the competence of the above suc-
cessive codes. Where a code is not competent to lay down specific rules,
it should lay down broad principles to guide the codes lower down m the
hierarchical lines. The problems in cataloguing have all been analysed apd
found to fall in ten levels. It is also possible to allocate the different levels
to the different members of the hierarchy [RI2].
70
CHAPTER CG
PRINCIPLE Of osmosis
0 Priaciple of Osmosis. — ^The principle that, when a change in
the CaUdogne Code or in the Scheme of Classification becomes
necessary in defer^ice to the Canon of Context, on and after a
chosen date
1 All the new accessions be catalogued and classified
according to the new Catalogue Code and the new Scheme
of Classification;
2 Just those of the old collection as are known to be in
much use be recatalogued and reclassified, with an additional
temporary staff, if necessary, during the first few months;
3 llie new accessions and the recatalogued and reclassified
books be kept in a New Collection and similaiiy their catalogue
cards too kept in a New Collection;
4 The rest of the old collection be kept as Old Collection
and similarly their catalogue cards too be kept as Old Collection;
5 Readers’ attention be invited by the Reference Librarian
to the existence of the Two Collections;
6 If any book is taken out by a reader from the Old Colleo
tion, on its return by him it be recatalogued and reclassified and
absorbed in the New Collection and similarly with its cat^ogue
cards.
1 Capitulatton to the Dead Past
The Canon of Context will bring about now and again changes in the
Rute of Catalogue Code and in the Scheme of Classification. At present
this change is met in one of two ways in cataloguing practice.
According to «)pe, the entire collection of a library is recatalogued and
reclassified. The cost of this is enormous. Often, to find the necessary
money, active service is starved; reference service is cut out; book-fupd is
deplgted. All this amounts nearly to a criminal waste of library fund. ; Law
of Parsimony is therefore chagrined.
In the second wgy of practice, eyes are closed in the ostridt way to the
diange in the Catalogue Code and in the Scheme of dassification. The
obsolete Code and Scheme are perpetuated in defiance of the Canon of Con-
^ and of the Laws of Library Science, and to the ne^ect of unex*
71
COi ClJU9SIFliBD CAt^^ b
ptmsd needs, llib vmy amounts to tying the future up to the deitd past
This capitulatiofi to the dead past is fatal to any social inftitutkm; and library
is a life-giving sodal Institution. ^
2 Living the Present
The right vfdy riiown by the Canon of Context is to live the present, »/We
should neither waste the resources nor do disservice to readers, ^he
Principle of Osmosis helps us to chalk out the right way. According to It,
the documents of a library fall into three groups :
1 New docianents;
2 Documents— usually or mostly of recent past— continuing to be in
active use; and
3 Old documents rarely, or only occasionally, in use;
When the Catalogue Code or the Scheme of Classification has to be changed,
the three groups should be treated differently [G3].
3 New Documents
. From the date of change over, all the new documents should be catalogued
' by the New Code and classified by the New Scheme of Classification. Diese
should be kept as “New Collection^. Their catalogue cards also should be
kept as a “New Collection”, according to the Principle of Parallel Movement
enunciated in the Library administration [RL3], and the Library manual
[RL6]. This does not mean any extra cost.
4 Recent Documents in Active Use
Within a short period after the date of change over to the New Catalogue
Code and to the New Scheme of Classification or even in anticipation of it,
the active documents of the recent past should be rapidly re-catalogued.
In some cases, no serious change will be necessary. The only work to be
done will be to pick out their cards from the old collection, and insert them
in the new collection. The documents themselves should be similarly trans-
ferred from the old to the new collection, as and when the cards are trans-
ferred, according to the Principle of Parallel Movement. A suitable mark
should be put above the class number on the tag in the back and in
the back of title page to indicate the absorption of the document in
the New Collection. In some cases, slight changes in the existing cards may
prove sufficient. Only in a few cases, total re-cataloguing may become
neoessaiy. In all cases the routine of absorption should be completed for
each quantum of documents recatalogued at one time as if it were a single
indivisible job; otherwise, chaos will result. The quantity of man-hour
needed for this routine of absorption will depend upon the number of docu-
ments to be so absorbed within the short time. In a Service-Libraiy, eighty
percent of use is estimated to be confined to the accessions of the last five
years. Even this eighty percent is likely to be distributed as follows:-— 50
percent of the current year, 25 percent of the last year, 12 percent of the
72
OF
«ec(md Ittit yiBar« and ao on in diminishing sequence, spue method of
matieal^pldklng rattle in active use is to register for the Catalogue
ltevi»on Section all the documents of the ‘*01d Collection** going out on
loan. Wmi they are returned by readers, the documents will automatically
go,^to the Catalogue Revision Section. Their catalogue cards should be
dKideed up ^d the routine of their absorption into the New Collection
should be completed. The pressure of this work will be high only for about
three months in most libraries. Thereafter, it will decrease progressively.
This way of absorption of old documents in current use will require additional
staff only for a short period.^ The number of volumes to be so treated may
not exceed 10,000 in a Service-Library.^ The extent of extra w<lrk to be
done on this kind of absorption in a National Central Library can be worked
out from experience. Even there, the proportion of the special staff needed
to the pennanent staff, and the duration for which the special staff will be
needed will not be very different from that of a Service-Library.
5 Osmotic Pressure of Use
^ After the first few months of high-pressure absorption, the daily quota
of^ absorption will become small. It will go on thinning almost to a vanishing
point in about five years. By that time, all the “Live Books’* would have
been transferred by the “Osmotic Pressure of Use” from the Old Collection
to the New CoUection. The “dead books” will for ever remain in the Old
Collection, without any harm to any reader. This is the Prindple of Osmosis.}
This is a contribution of the Principle of Local Variation applied in one of
its extreme spheres of jurisdiction, This Principle of Osmosis suggested
itself to me, while visiting many aged libraries during my tour of Europe
and America in 1948. The pathetic look of the younger members of the
cataloguing sections of big libraries caught ray eye. They were internally
revolting against having to use the Catalogue Codes of earlier centuries.
But their chiefs, who had given up active cataloguing and active reference
service and had become mere administrators and committee men, did not
have the time or the willingness to understand the urge of the juniors to change
over, in order to make library service real. Or, cataloguing was, in some places
done by the old guards in whom mental fibrosis had set in and who did
cataloguing without any awareness of the latest thought on library service or
sensitiveness to the social changes since the time their Catalogue Codes were
framed. When their thought was disturbed, they immediately struck the
disturber, crying, ^Theory, theory, all theory !” This made me think out
the deeper reason for such wide-spread resistance to any change in cata-
loguing and classification. It was found to be the cost of re<ata]oguing
of the whole of a large collection. This simmered in the mind for some
time. The Principle of Osmosis came forth and gave a possible solution of
the problem.
73
PART D
EVOLUTION OF THE CATALOGUE
CHAPTER DA
FUNCTIONS OF THE CATALOGUE
1 Introductioo
A Library Catalogue is essentially a tool. Hence» its parts and detaib
are to be designed so as to make it an efficient tool. This means that in
designing the Catalogue we must take its chief functions into consideration.
The functions to be perfottned by a Library Catalogue have been discussed
in detail in the light of the Laws of Library Science elsewhere [RF5]. That
discussion may be summarised by the statement that a Vbmy Catalogue
should be so designed as to
1 Disdose to every reader his or her document;
2 Secure for every document its reader;
3 Save the time of the reader; and for this purpose
4 Save the time of the staff.
To pursue Cutter's line of approach and restate the purpose in a more
specific way, the functions of a library catalogue are to [C3};
1 Enable a person to find a book of which either the
A Author, or
B Title, or
C Subject is known;
2 Show what the library has
D by a given author,
£ on a given subject, and
F in a given kind of literature; and
3 Assist in the choice of a book as to its
G Edition, and
H Character.
2 Museum Tradition
Historically, however, the nature of the Library Catalogue has. been for
long influenced bym powerful tradition. In this tradition, undue emphasis
was placed on the library as a museum, where books are housed for preser-
vation. Under its influence, the primary purpose of the catalogue was
naturally taken to be that of serving as an inventory of the contents of the
library. To make this inventory catalogue as simple as possible, it was
made of the title-a-line type, listing the books in the accession sequence,
with the books themselves arranged on the shelves in the same accession
sequence. The task of building up a catalogue of this primitive type is not
difficult and calls for no very elaborate code.
77
DA3 cxASsmm catalogs otm
A Sgfeit SdcawBiinaMp
The foioe that has been trying to oust this museum tradition imty be dei*
cdbed as the foroe of *Saleunan^p\ This force emanated ftom a near
view of the lilnaty. According to this view, a library is an institution charged
with the duty of converting every person in its area into its regular costomor
and serving the dustomers so well, so promptly, and with such exact rdhrenoe
to their specific heeds, that they would gladly keep on as customers. A
library is not a museum but a workshop, full of life and activiQr. It is Vjpt
the book which gets rapidly worn out by constant use that should worry a
library according to this view, but it is the book which would seldom leave
the shelf that needs anxious attention and effective treatment This view is
now levohitionismg everything connected with the library— book sdection,
shelf arrangement, architecture, furniture, location, hours, finance, staffs
attitude towards, readers, and last but not least the Library Cataloi^. It is
also among other things tiying to relegate the spirit of inventory to its legiti-
mate far off place in the back-ground so as not to smother the nascent ^irit
of service— service at any cost, service at any risk— which is slowly but rightly
enlivening the libraries of to-day.
4 Struggle of the Catalogue
41 First Victory
The first struggle over the Library Catalogue between the inventory tradi-
tion and the service spirit resulted in a compromise. The title-a-Iine entry
was preserved but the entries were to be, not in the accession sequence, but
in the alphabetical sequence of the names of authors. This replacement
of the vagaries of accession by the vagaries of the alphabet was, to some
extent, due to the service spirit not knowing its own mind, not having had
^ough experience to know what interested readers most — ^the author or
the subject-matter.
42 Second Victory
But it did not take long to see the importance of subject-matter. The
first result of seeing it was to get one more concession, viz, replacing the
single alphabetical sequence by a numb^ of such sequences— at the rate of
one sequence to each of a few— say fifteen or twenty— broad classes into
which knowledge was divided. The catalogues of a few of our libraries
are still at one or other of these stages.
43 Emancipation
The real emancipation of the Library Catalogue from the hold of the
inv^oiy tradition dates from the invention of the shelf-registo', which, as
the name implies, lists the books on the basis of a title-a-line entry, in a sequ-
ence which is exactly parallel to the sequence of the books on the shelves.
The inventory spirit being thus cut off with a special registo of its own, the
catalogue began to develop along lines natural to Itself and condudve to
the fulfilment of the new service-spirit of the Libraries.
78
CHAPTER DB
PARTS OF LIBRARY CATALOGUE
1 Ufiipirtite CHctioiiiiry Catalogue
The first lifie of development led to what is known as the Dlcdonaiy
Catalogue, ft consists of a single part, with the components differentiated
to suit the different functions to be performed by the catalogue. Theper«
fection of this fotm has engaged many an inventive brain firom the middle of
the last century. It has developed some new techniques~-the fixing of subject
headings toeing an example of colossal magnitude.
11 New Bigotry
The revolutionaries— the tradition-breakers— of one generation themselves
become the conservatives of the next, fondly clinging to the new tradtion,
which they themselves founded in tl^ place of those broken down by them.
So it is in library cataloguing. The fascination of grappling with the difii-
culties with which the dictionary catalogue bristles seems to have so narrowed
the vision that the immediate and next stage of evolution in the catalogue is
either not perceived or resisted with bigotry.
2 Btpaitite Classified Catalogue
The next stage in the evolution of the library catalogue consists in splitting
it into two parts, on the basis of the differences of function— one part holding
all the components giving information about what the library has on various
subjects and the other holding all the other components. The arrangement
in the former is by Call Numbers and Class Numbers; and this is filiatory.
Hie arrangement in the latter is alphabetical as in a dictionary. That this
bipartite form of catalogue is a more evolved form than the unipartite dic-
tionary catalogue will be conceded by those that believe that evoluticm means
differentiation in structure to meet differentiation in function. Ibose who,
however, hold the view that the ultimate stages of evolution lead to unification
and not to differentiation, must learn by experience the enormous difltoiltics
of a dictionary catalogue and the comparatively easy elimination or handling
of such difficulties in*the classified from of catalogue emphasised in this code.
21 A Cause for Delay
The delay in the emergence of the bipartite form as the dominant form
has been due, not merely to the resistance of the practitioners of the unipartite
Dlaionary Catalogue, but also to the then absence of a scheme of book^
dassification which
1 Individualises specific subjects of any degree of intension whatever;
7a
DB21 icLASSIFIBD CAtALOOUE CODE
2 Airanges specific subject at aH levels in an amptobkfiliatcHrymiieiioe;
and
3 Individualises the different books in a specific subject.
22 A Fallacy
A subtle fallacy also leads to the ret^tion of the Dictionary Catalogue
in preference to the Dassified. The ordinary reader, it is argued, is familiar
only with alphabetical arrangement and that the catalogue, being primarily
for his use, should be purely alphabetical. The premises of this argument are
correct but a fallacy lurks in the introduction of the epithet ‘purely’. All
that the premises warrant is that there should be an alphabetical part through
which the ordinary reader can enter the catalogue. The second part of the
bipartite Classified Catalogue is alphabetical just for this purpose.
80
CHAPTER DC
RIGHT APPROACH
1 A Deeper FonctliMi
If the reader’s interest is for a particular book or a book by a particular
author, the alphabetical part is sufficient by itself to satisfy his want But
if it is interest in a subject which takes him to the librazy, his wants will be
better served if the catalogue can spread before him a full, connected, pano-
rama of all the materials on his specific subject, all its subdivisions, and all
broader subjects of which it is itself a subdivision. Moreover, few readers
are able to name their specific subjects exactly. It is a broader or a narrower
subject that is usually thought of. But whatever is brought up and however
wide of mark it may be, the alphabetical part tells him, as it were, *Tor all
books on the subject you mention and on all connected subjects, look up the
region of the Classified Part covered by number so and so.” There he finds
displayed the full field of his Interest. When he enters it, he finds all that he
was vaguely conscious of having wanted; and indeed it is only then that he
is able to know the exact subject he wanted.
11 Unexpressed Wants
The function of the number is exhausted as soon as the reader enters
. the region indicated by it. Thereafter the numbers do not occupy this thought
or distract him. His mind is fully occupied with the helpful filiatory way
in which the names of his books follow one after another. He is delighted.
This delight is at bottom due to the satisfaction of unexpressed wants and to
the getting of something which he did not know how to ask for. This
represents a deeper function to be performed by the library catalogue.
2 Duty of the Library
It is the duty of the library to meet such unexpressed wants, particularly
because an ordinary reader does not know how to give shape to them and state
them. The Dictionary Catalogue, with its inevitable alphabetical scattering
of subjects instead of collocation, cannot satisfy this want. Its maze of
^See also* direction^ will virtually tire out the ordinary reader by sending
him from pillar to post.
3 Holism in the Catalogue
It is unchivalrous to say to the reader, as it were, “You say you can enter
the catalogue only with the alphabetical key. Ergo, then you shall have it !
But you will have to use the alphabet not only at the beginning but through-
out and to the very end.” This is too great a penalty to be imposed upon
the reader. It is pushing the ‘alphabet’ beyond its legitimate function. Real
81
6
DC3
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
efGdency a&d gracefulness consist in confining the use of egidhi tool to the
purpose for which it is best suited or designed. To display the lesouioes of
a library in a filiatory sequence the correct means is the dassified arrangement
and not the alphabetical one. . As the library catalogue has to do this and
as the reader can enter it only with the alphal^tical key, a bipartite catalogue
with a dassified and an alphabetical part is the only suitable one. Such a
holism should prevail in the catalogue. It can be seen that the Classified
Part is designed to suit the fimctions marked by Cutter as (C), (£), (F)» (O)
and (H); while the Alphabetical Part corresponds to the functions (A), (B),
(D) and to some extent (H) also. It can also be seen that the Alphatetical
Part is virtually the Dictionary Catalogue mmus the Specific Subject Entries.
4 Future of the Catalogue
If the bipartite form of catalogue comes into general use, it will doubtless
lead to more evolved and more effident forms in the future. For the time
being, however, the bipartite Classified Catalogue should be popularised
and this code is, therefore, devoted mainly to the rules relating to its com-
pdatioD. And yet to help those lagging behind in the times of the Dictionary
Catalogue, supplementary Rules to suit this form of catalogue are given
wherever warranted.
82
CHAPTER DD
PHYSICAL FORM OF THE
LIBRARY CATALOGUE
1 Book Form
The book form of the Library Catalogue, whether printed or manuscript,
has been made an anachronism by the Fifth Law. Nearly a century ago,
Jewett wrote the epitaph of the printed catalogue in his addre^ to a conference
of librarians held in New York City:
“While the catalogue of a large library is passing through the press,
new books are received, the titles of which it is impossible in the ordinary
manner of printing, to incorporate with the body of the work. Re-
course must then be had to a supplement. In no other way can the
acquisitions of the library be made known to the public. If the number
of supplements be multiplied as they have been in the Library of Congress,
the student may be obliged to grope his weary way through ten cata-
logues, instead of one, in order to ascertain whether the book which he
seeks be in the library. He cannot be certain, even then, that the book is
not in the collection, for it may have been received since the last appendix
was printed. Supplements soon become .intolerable. The whole
catalogue must then be rearranged and reprinted. The expense of this
process may be borne so long as the library is smaU, but it soon becomes
burdensome, and, ere long, insupportable, even to national establishments.
“There is but one course left— not to print at all. To this no scholar
consents, except from necessity. But to this alternative, grievous as
it is, nearly all the large libraries of Europe have been reluctantly driven.**
2 Move Forward
India has been reputed to be the dumping ground for practices discarded
elsewhere. Long experience of this seems to have developed even a special
fascination for the antediluvian. It is often welcomed and fondled, instead
of allowing it to die a peaceful death. The printed library catalogue evi-
dently belongs to this category. There may not be enough money to buy
books, to maintain%n adequate staff, to get the books better circulated and
used, to extend the hours of the library or to light or furnish it attractively;
but money is found, or rather whatever money there may be is diverted, to
print or reprint the catalogue. Let us hope that this will not continue for
ever even in India. India should move forward.
3 Evolution to Card Form
The Five laws traces the evolution of the physical form of the Library
Catalogue from the closely written bound book, through the interspaced and
83
DD3 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CCWOT
interleaved one, through paste«down form, through the sheaf form, to the
present card form.
4 Card Fmm, Not the Last Word
The pressure of the Fifth Law is not yet felt anywhere in India to the same
extent as in Europe and America. Most libraries still maintain their cata-
logues in the primitive book form. Some of these even conspire to pull
down the more forward ones from the card stage they have reached back
to the old book stage. Further, even in the libraries that have adopted the
modem card form, the rate of growth is by no means of the order that has
become common in the West. The card catalogue is thus believed to be the
last word in the physical form of the catalogue. But it is not wise to proceed
with that belief. The inexorable Fifth Law of Library Science may have
something in store for the next stage in the evolution of the physical form
of the catalogue.
5 Service Library
In a local Service Library, the Fifth Law itself would put a ceiling to the
number of volumes to be stored in it. In its case the Fifth Law would make
the growth in the stock of the library take the form of replacement of the
different out-moded and worn-out books by new books comparable in number.
Therefore, it is likely that the card form of catalogue does not create much
difficulty in the case of a local Service Library. A card form may continue
for a long time as the most helpful form.
6 National Central Library
The position, however, is different in the case of a National Central Library
and even of a Regional or State Central Library. In their case, the Fifth
Law would allow growth by continuous addition of volumes without with-
drawal of old ones. The size of the catalogue will therefore grow continuously.
It will soon reach a size, obstructing its efficient use. In fact, such a size has
already been reached by the card catalogue of libraries, such as, the Library
of Congress (USA), the New York Public Library, and the Lenin Library
in Moscow. The very catalogue room of such a library is bigger than
the entire building of many a. service library. Apart from the cost
of the maintenence of such a huge catalogue, the readers too may find
using of such a leviathan catalogue irksome and time-consuming. What
is the solution ? ^
7 Micro Film Form
One possible solution may be to have the catalogue in micro form, such as
micro film or micro card. But there will be a practical difficulty in using
that form. The Fifth Law itself will cause that difficulty. In a huge library,
about a hundred books may be added almost every day. This rate of growth
in the stock carries with it the implication that about six hundred entries
will have to be interpolated at different conceivable points among the already
84
PHYSICAL FORM OP THE UBRARY CATALOGUE DD8
enstiflg entries. What will technology say to this ? Can the micro film
technologists handle this problm succe^ully and at a reasonable cost ?
8 A Compromise
If they cannot, one can think of a compromise. The compromise is
suggested by the Principle of Osmosis already described in Chap CG. Entries
of reading materials, other than those in cunent use, may be micro-filmed.
The entries of the volumes in current use may be maintained in the conven-
tional card form. Then the catalogue will be in two forms and sequences —
one in micro-film form for the older books, and the other in card form for
cunent books. This may be a solution for the present. In due course,
however, a separation of the entries in the card form will have to be made
again into those to be reduced to the micro-film form and those to be retained
in card form. To pursue this matter will almost amount to a speculation
at this stage. Moreover, the number of libraries in the world that will have
to face this situation will be relatively small.
85
CHAPTER DE
CENTRALISED CATALOGUING
1 Begtimlngs
The iirst stage in the national centralisation of cataloguing was brought
into vogue in the United States in 1901. From then» the Library of Congress
prints the catalogue card of each book. Copies of this card are available
for sale. I saw such a system in vogue in Denmark also during my tour
in 1948. The Bibliographical Institute was in charge of the work. Since
1950, the British national bibliography is unobtrusively and obliquely influenc*
ing the British libraries to accept centralised classification and cataloguing.
It has begun to supply catalogue cards within 48 hours of order. Often,
the catalogue car^ arrive even before the books arrive [Wl]. Centralised
Service of printing catalogue cards is also practised by the Deutsches
Bucherei, the Central Bibliographical Institute in Leipzig. It seeks to
cover all German books in whatever country published. It can be
no wonder if the Fifth Law of Library Science dances with joy, on observing
this development in the organisation of cataloguing work.
2 National Saving
If Centralised Cataloguing is done, national saving will be as much as
79 per cent [RH3] in respect of all the publications in the countiy.
3 International Saving
If each country establishes Centralised Cataloguing and 9II countries
cooperate with one another in the exchange of the results of central cataloguing,
there will be a saving of 79 per cent [RH7] in respect of the books published
in all the cooperating countries. This will of course require, as condition-
precedent, prevalence of peaceful intercourse between nations.
4 Position in India
There is a great shortage of well-trained cataloguing man-power in the
country. But the libraries are growing in number as a 'result of the current
renaissance. The economical method of meeting the situation will be to
adopt Centralised Cataloguing. This cannot be done for the country as a
whole. There should be a diversified organisation for it. In each of the
Constituent States, there should be a State Central Cataloguing Body for the
books in the language of the State. There should be a Union Central Cata-
loguing Body to take charge of the books in English, Sanskrit, and in any
other Indian languages in which books are published in different parts of
the countiy [RIIJ.
86
CENTRAUSED CATAIX)OUING DBS
5 Fre-Natal Catatopring
The next st^ in the evolution of the organisation for cataloguing will be
for the National Central Body and the State Central Body for Cataloguing to
get the proof copies* of books even before they are published and provide
the call number and the catalogue entries for each book. Then the class
number can be printed in the back of the title page. The catalogue cards
can be printed even before the book is released. This is called Fre*Natal
Cataloguing [RPl].
87
PART B
RECORDING
CHAPTER EA
LANGUAGE OF ENTRIES
1 FaTOured Language
The language in which the majority of the documents of
the library occur.
Normally the language of the country or region or State is likely to be
the Favoured Language. But in a specialist library, the Favoured Language
may be different from the language of the country or region or State. Due
to historical causes, English is now the Favoured Language in many of the
generalist libraries in India.
2 Scale of Languages
A list of languages, to be kept by a library, in which the
Favoured Language is given the first place and the other
languages are entered in the descending scale of popularity.
It is not easy to give a definite and unique sequence of popularity for
arranging the languages. But each library may be able to decide from
experience some working scale. All that is wanted is that this should be a
fixed one. For example, in the University Library at Madras, English was
used as the Favoured Language. The scale of languages was as follows:
English, Tamil, Malayalam, Telugu, Kanarese, Sanskrit, Hindi, Urdu, Frendh,
German, etc.
3 Most Popular Language
Among a given set of languages, the language occurring earliest
in the scale of languages.
4 Preference of Favoured Language
Generally speaking, an entry in a library catalogue is to
be in the Favoured Language of the Library. The Rules in
Sec S of this Chap deal with the elements in an Entry to be
written in a different language.
91
EA5 cxAssmED catalogue code
5 Use of Non-favonred Laiqiaage
51 Proper Noun
Proper Nouns in any Entry are to be written in the language in
which it occurs on the title-page and its over-flow of the docu-
ment, except that the special rules of Chap JB are to be followed
in the case of the name of a Geographical Entity.
lliis is obvious. It is wrong to translate a Proper Noun on the basis of
the dictionary meanings of the word(s) constituting it. For example, it is
wrong to enter my name in an entry in the translated form ‘Lord of the Stage*.
It is equally wrong to enter the name of my collaborator, in this edition, in
an entry in the trarrslated form ‘Blue Cloud.’
52 Title of a Document
The title of a document is to be written in the language in which
it occurs on the title-page.
521 POLYGLOT TITLE
If the title of a document is given on the title page in two or
more languages, it is to be written in the Most Popular Language
of the library.
522 ADDITION OF TRANSLATION
If the title of the document is not in the Favoured Language and
it is not a proper noun but is descriptive, its translation in the
Favoured Language may be added within square brackets as a
separate sentence in the title section, either in the Main Entry
alone or also in specific Added Entries according to a subsidiary
rule to be framed by each library in conformity to the Principle of
Local Variation.
92
CHAPTER EB
SCRIPT OF THE ENTRIES
1 Favoured Script
The script of the Favoured Language of the library; and in
exceptional cases any other script chosen by the library as the
Favoured Script.
For example, the Favoured Language of a Library of Books in Sanskrit
in USA will be Sanskrit. But, it may choose as its Favoured Script, not
the Nagari — ^i e, the Sanskrit — Script, but the Roman Script.
2 Preferaice of Favoured Script
Generally speaking, the script of an entry in a library catalogue
is to be in its Favoured Script.
An alternative is considered in Sec S AS
3 Transliteration
If the title-page is not in the Favoured Script of the library, the
words takm from the title page arc to be transliterated in that
Script in accordance with an accepted table of transliteration.
The script of this book being Roman all the examples in it are in Roman
script. It is equivalent to saying that the examples are printed as for a library
whose favoured script is Roman.
31 Transliteration Table
The table given in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain
and Ireland or any other standard table, put up as an international or national
standard, as the case may be, is to be used for the scripts covered by them.
The table mentioned first in the above Rule is based on the agreement
arrived at in an International Congress of Orientalists.
4 Li Edition 1
The first edition of this book reproduced a slightly modified form of that
table. But in actual practice, we found it unhelpful because it did not indicate
the shapes of consonant-vowel combinations. Twenty more pages would
be required to indicate them. It was felt that the frequency of use of the
93
EB4 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
tables would not justify sparing so many pages for them. Further, the bodies
of the types of the different languages are so different that they cannot be
composed in the same line. This necessitated the making of blocks for all
the pages of the tables. This would increase the cost beyond economic
limits. The tables have, therefore, been omitted in this edition.
5 TnusUteration into Indian Scripts
At present, tables exist only for transliteration into Roman Script. Tables
for transliteration into most other scripts — particularly the Indian scripts — are
yet to be standardised.
We cannot expect any other country to take up this task. The Indian
Standards Institution should seize this task and complete it in collaboration
with the linguists of the different regions of the country. Its EC2— Docu-
mentation Committee-^should co-opt linguistic scholars and establish a
standard for transliteration from western scripts into Indian scripts. There
is another task even more urgent than this. It is the establishment of standards
for transliteration from one Indian script to another. For, apart from the
Tamil script and the Urdu script differing considerably in the phonetic make
up from the other Indian scripts, even among the other Indian scripts there
are substantial differences in respect of the phonetic values of a few letters
of the alphabet. Thus there is scope for considerable work to be done in
internal transliteration by the Documentation Committee of the Indian
Standards Institution. The present drive for emotional integration through
literature service calls immediate attention to this problem of internal
transliteration.
94
CHAPTER EC
ARTICLES AND CONTRACTIONS
1 Articles
Some Rules prescribe omission of initial articles. The following list of
articles is given to facilitate recognition:
Arabic: ad, al, ar, as, at, ez.
Dutch: de, het, *t, ecn, eene.
English: a, an, the
French: le, la, les, un, une
German: das, der, die, ein, eine
Hebrew: Ha, he
Hungarian: a, az, egy
Italian: gli, gl, j, il, 1', la, le, lo, un,
una, uno
Portuguese: a, as, o, um, uma
Scandinavian: de, den, det, en, et,
ett
Spanish: el, la, lo, los, un, una
Yiddish : der, di, dos
The numeral adjective meaning “one” should be distinguished from an
article of the same form and should not be omitted.
2 ONitractions
The following are the contractions to be used, in writing entries:
Abkiirzung
, . Abkurz
Director
,. Dir
Abridged
. , Abr
Edited
.. Ed
Abteilung(en)
.. Abt
Edito
.. Ed
Annotated
. . Annot
Editor(s)
.. Ed
Annotation
. . Annot
Edition
.. Ed
Annotator(s)—
. , Annot
Edizione
.. Ed
Assistant
. . Assis
Epitome
. . Epit
Auflage(«n)
.. Aufl
Epitomised
. . Epit
Au$gabe(n)
. . Ausg
Epitomiser(s)
. . Epit
Ausgewahit
Ausgew
Erklarung(en)
.. Erkl
Authors)
. . Auth
Fascicule
.. Fasc
Band
B
Gckurzt
.. Gek
Bearbciter
. . Bearb
Gesammelt
. . Ges
Bcarbeitet
. . Bearb
Heft
.. H
Before Christ
?. BC
Hcrausgeber
.. Her
Century
. . Cent
Herausgegeben
.. Her
Commentary
, . Comm
Illustration
.. Til
Comraentator(s)
. . Comm
lllustrator(s)
.. Ill
Compiled
. . Comp
lllustrazione
.. Ill
Compilcr(s)
. . Comp
Introduction
. . Introd
Dedicated
.. Ded
Introduction
..
Dedicatee(s)
.. Ded
writer(s)
. . Introd
Dedication
.. Ded
Introductory
. . Introd
95
EC2 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
Introduzione
. . Introd
Joint
.. J
Nouveau
. . Nouv
Nouvelle
. . Nouv
Number(s)
.. N
Omarbcide(t)
. . Omarb
Oversat
. . Overs
Page(s)
.. P
Popular
Pop
Preface
.. Pref
Prologo
. . Prol
Pseudonym
. . Pseud
Redigirt
., Red
Report
. . Rep
Reported
. . Rep
Reporter
. . Rep
Revidiertc
.. Rev
Revised
. . Rev
Revision
. . Rev
Revisor(s)
. . Rev
Samlede va^ker
Sam
Sammlung
• • Sam
Special
.. Sp
Tcil(e)
.. Tc
Tome
.. T
lYadotto
.. Tr
Traduction
.. Tr
Traduit
.. Tr
Traduzione
.. Tr
Translated
.. Tr
TransIation(s}
.. Tr
TranslatorCs)
.. Tr
Udgave(r)
.. Udg
Udgiver(e)
.. Udg
Obersetzt
. . Ubers
Obersetzung
. , Ub«s
Uitgaaf
. . tJitg
Vertaler
.. Vert
Volume(s)
.. V
3 Cognate Words
As far as po$sible> cognate words are provided the same contraction.
4 Homonymous Contractions
Some of the contractions prescribed are homonymous. For example*
the contraction ‘Tr’ denotes ‘Translated,’ ‘Translation,’ and ‘Translatoi(s)’.
The context of its occurrence will resolve the homonym.
96
CHAPTER ED
STYLE OF WRITING
1 Introduction
The style of making the entries is, to some extent, to depend on the physical
form of the catalogue. From this point of view, three physical forms may
be lecogaised-— the bound-book form; the loose-leaf form; and the card
form. The choice of form has to be made in the light of the Fifth Law of
Library Science, The main concern of the Fifth Law is to give full weight to
the need for casual repairs and frequent addition of entries even while the
catalogue continues to be in use. It has been discussed in detail in the Five
laws of library science [RF9].
11 Physical Form of the Catalogue
The days of time-honoured bound-book form are gone for ever—never
to return — ^at least in the case of a growing Service-Library. The loose-leaf
form and the card form arc so much alike, that they admit of nearly the
same style of making the entries. As the card form marks a later stage of
evolution, as it is rightly more popular, and as it is desirable to make the
rules definite, this chapter deals only with the style of making entries for a
card catalogue.
12 Card Catalogue
In order that the right sequence of all entries— old as well as new taken
together— may always be easily maintained, each card is to get only one entry,
except where rules provide for the consolidation of several consecutive entries
into a single 'Consolidated I7ntry.’
Experience has singled out cards, 124 x 75 x 0.25 mm, as of the most
convenient size. They are referred to as ‘standard cards’ for cataloguing
purposes. If the catalogue, as a tool, is to have the longest lease of life
possible, it is desirable that cards of the best texture should be used. To
secure elegance, it is better to have ruled cards.
* 13 Printed Card
Next to the choice of the material on which the entry is to be made, we
have to examine the mode of making the entry. Is the entry to be printed,
type-written, or written by hand ? Printing will be ideal, if economically
possible. As the cost of printing goes to-day, it is not economical for indi-
vidual libraries. It may be possible in countries where co-operative catalogu-
ing is practised. The number of such countries is, however, now small
IRT6].
97
EDM
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
14 Typed Card
A$ for typing, tiie chief problem is the availability of the right sort of
ribbon which will leave behind it an indelible impression. The handling of
single cards need not be considered however a serious handicap, as it may
be possible to produce the cards in reels of suitable length. Typing may be
too expensive for some libraries.
15 Written Card
Thus writing by hand may be the only mode practicatde ip many individual
libraries — ^at least for some time in the newly developing countries.
i'
16 Unit Card System
No library can get on with a single copy of the catalogue. Further, the
tendency now is to have groups of small libraries knit together. This organi-
sation involves having a number of copies of the catalogue. The number
is usually too small, however, to make printing economical. Hence the
library world is now engaged in carrying on various experiments in the matter.
Many near-printing processes have now come into use. Libraries which use
t^ese processes or printing itself will find it economical to use the *Unit Card*
system. This system uses copies of the Main Entry Card for Added Entries
also by adding the Headings of the latter at the top or underlining those words
in the title-portion which should bp regarded as Headings. Detailed rules
for these are easily framed by individual libraries.
The rules of this chapter bear upon the style of writing the entries in cards
in individual libraries. This brings us to two other issues, v/z, the writing
fluid to be used and the hand in which the entries are to be written.
2 Writing
21 Writing Fluid
The indelibility of the ink used should be such as to make the
entry last as long as the card lasts.
The catalogue is a permanent record and the cost of renewing it wholesale
would be prohibitive. Hence this rule.
22 Use of Pencil
Call Numbers and Class Numbers should, however, be in
pencil.
These are liable to revision and change. Hence this rule.
98
ED24
STYLE OF WRITING
23 Library Hand
All words and numbers in an Entry are to be in a bold upright
hand, their letters and digits being detached from one another.
As regards the handle we are between two opposing factors. On the one
side, the hand in which a person writes is singularly personal. The science
of graphology is based on this fact. On the other hand, the catalogue of a
growing library accretes to itself several entries from week to week, over in
indefinitely large|^uaiber of generations. Hence, if all the calligraphic
idiosyncrasies of^Uthe successive cataloguers be given full play, the catalogue
would (^rtainh^^^^gpn3e an unattractive hotchpotch. The library world
would rather smiftce the individuality in the handwriting of cataloguers than
make the heterogeneous style of the catalogue offend or repel the readers.
Accordingly, it has, in recent years, developed an impersonal hand and dubbed
it the library Hand.’ It is claimed that even a person with a bad hand can
practise it with success and, what is more, can write it fairly fast. Here is
Library Hand for the Roman Script and the Indo-Arabic Numerals.
ABCDEFGHIJ.
KLMN OPQRS
TUV WXYZ
dbcdefghlj kimnop
c^r sta'O'Ojxx^^
l2 3 45b78SO
A similar standard should be established for the favoured script of a library
and implemented.
24 Rules on Style of Writing
Before we proceed to state the rules of this chapter, an apology is due to
the reader. An actual demonstration of writing the various kinds of cards
99
ED24 CXASSIHED CATALOGUE CODE
would be more etle^ive than a chapter of rules. But, as the author of a bode
is denied the privilege of personal demonstration, he is driven to the circum-
locutory mode of describing them by rules. Hence, 1 would request the reader
to bear with me in this matter and follow the rules by actually writing out
sample cards.
25 Lines in an Entry
1 Leading Line. — ^The top-most horizontal line of a card.
2 First Vertical. — The left-most vertical line of a card.
3 Second Vertical. — The vertical line which is to the right of
the First Vertical of a card.
In what follows, some of the definitions given in Chap B7 arc assumed.
*
3 Leading Section
The Leading Section — that is, the section- beginning on the
Leading Line — and all its continuation lines are to be commenced
at the First Vertical.
4 Other Sections
41 General
All the other Sections except an Index Number Section, an
Accession Number Section, and the Second Section in a Series
Index Entry are to be commenced at the Second Vertical.
42 Continuation Lines
The continuation lines of all sections are to be commenced at
the First Vertical.
43 Index Number Section
«
The Index Section is to be as far to the right as possible in the
Section preceding it or in the first line after the said last line.
44 Serial Number
The Serial Number in the Second Section of a Series Index
Entry is to be commenced at the First Vertical, while the word
100
STHJB OF WKITim
EDM
which follows the Serial Number is to be commencecl at the
Second Vertical or as far further to its right as may be necessary
if the Serial Number is so long as to go beyond the Second
Vertical.
45 Accession Number Section
The Accession Number Section is to begin at the First Vertical
of the bottom-most line.
451 TWO OR MORE ACCESSION NUMBERS
If two or more Accession Numbers are to be written in the same
Main Entry, they are to be in a sequence parallel to that of the
Book Numbers to which they correspond.
5 Typography
51 Entry Element
The words, other than auxiliary ones, in an Entry Element in a
Block in a Heading are to be in Block Letters.
52 Directing Element
A Directing Element is to be underlined. In print, it is to be
in italics.
53 Descriptive Element
A Descriptive Element is to be underlined. In print, it is to
be in italics. The first letter of each word in it other than an
auxiliary word is to be in capital.
54 Other Words
All the words in an Entry, other than those covered by Sections
ED51, ED52, and ED53 are to be written in ordinary hand as in
prose.
The word “and” connecting two Descriptive Elements also should be in
ordinary hand according to this Section.
101
ED5S CUSmiBD cataloode oodb
55 Niadbrau
All numbers, other than those forming part of the name of a
monarch or a pope or any other person or of a corporate body
and usually written in Roman Numerals, and other than Call
Numbers and Class Numbers are to be in Indo-Arabic
Niunerals.
6 Sequmce of Words
The words in a section are to be in their normal sequence,
except where a different sequence is specifically laid down by a
Riile.
7 Use of Capitals
The use of capitals is to be regulated by the rules of grammar of
the favoured language of the library, subject to Sec 51 and S3 of
this Chap.
8 Punctuation Marks
Punctuation marks are to be given as in ordinary prose, subject
to Rules 81 to 84 of this Chap.
It cannot be said that the rules of grammar regarding the use of capitals
and punctuation marks are very rigid or definite. They are, I believe, made
purposely elastic so that some freedom may be given to individual tastes.
But the result of giving freedom to the varying tastes of the individual cata-
loguers of a library will make the Library Catalogue unseemly. Hence, it is
recommended that the freedom, given by the rules of grammar, should not
be extended by a library to its individual cataloguers but that each library
riiould draw up its own rules and enforce them rigidly. On the other hand,
it is felt that it is not desirable that the freedom of the libraries also should
be cut out and a uniform set of rigid rules enforced on all libraries. But
to, make cooperative cataloguing among countries possiUe, the International
Catalogue Code itself should fix the rules of pimctuation marks for all the
national centres of cataloguing.
81 A Comma is to separate two consecutive Blocks in a
Heading.
82 A Comma is to separate a Descriptive Element in a Block
in a Heading, from what it describes.
102
STYLE OP WRmNG ED912
83 Circular brackets are to enclose each Individualising and
Secondary Element.
84 The conjunction between Blocks in a Heading may be
replaced by a comma. If this is done, semicolon should precede
a Descriptive Element instead of a comma.
#
This rule will be of use in a language calling for an inflection of the words
conisected and instead of the use of an auxiliary word equivalent to ^nd* —
for example, Tamil. By this means, the words can be in the nominative case
form.
91 Varieties of Natitm
910 .Inclusive Notation
A set of consecutive numbers represented by the symbol con*
sisting of
1 The first number of the set;
2 A dash; and
3 The last number of the set.
Exanytle : 3 — 18.
911 Years
Notwithstanding Rule 910 of this Chap, if the numbers denote
years, the second member of the inclusive notation is to consist of :
1 The last digit alone when the earlier digits are common to
both the members;
2 The last two digits alone when the earlier digits are
common to both the members; and
3 So on.
Example: 1962-3, 1952-963, 1852-963, 1963-2112.
, 912 Open Notation
An indefinite continuation of consecutive numbers beginning
from a specific number and represented by the symbol consisting
of
1 The specific number forming the beginning; and
2 A dash.
Exanqtle : 3 —
103
ED913
CLASSIFIQ) CATALOGUE C(X>E
913 Non-consecutive
The members of a sequence of non-consecutive numbers and
non-consecutive sets of consecutive numbers in inclusive notation,
are to be separated by commas.
Example : 3—18, 41—57, 85—
104
CHAPTER EE
SIZE OF BOOK
I Each library is to maintain a specification for deciding
whether a volume is to be regarded as
1 Undersized; or,
2 Oversized; or,
3 Abnormal for the reason of having too many plates or
maps or for any other peculiarity in its build or for any other'
reason such as rarity.
It is found from experience that it is convenient to have the pamphlets, the
giant folios and the other abnormal volumes, arranged in separate colIe<qtions
of their own. On the other hand, it is not desirable to have the entries cor-
responding to them taken out of their natural place in the catalogue. Hence,
there must be some simple method of showing, in their entries, the collections
in which they will be found in the stack-room.
One does not wish to be dogmatic in fixing the size for a ‘pamphlet,’ ‘giant
folio’ and so on. That is why this rule leaves the specification in the hands
of individual libraries. It is expected that each library should, in the light
of experience, write out a specification as a supplement to this rule.
An illustrative specification is given here.
A volume is deemed to be undersize if its
I I Breadth is less than 300 mm : and
121 Thickness is not greater than 5 mm;
or
122 Thickness is not greater than 30 mm and its height is less than 150 mm.
or
123 Thickness is not greater than 50 mm and its height is less than 120 mm.
or
124 Thickness is not greater than 150 mm and its height is less than 50 mm.
2 A volume is deemed to be oversized if its breadth is not less than 300 mm.
3 A volume is deemed to be abnormal if
31 It contains not less than 50 plates or maps or both plates and maps
taken together;
or
32 The paper is very poor, such as unpressed paper or paper loaded with
clay;
or
33 The Reference Section recommends its inclusion in the abnormal
sequence because of the peculiar nature of the contents or the scarcity value of
the volume.
105
CLASSIFI0> CATAUIGDE CXIDE
2 The Bo<^ Number of an undersized volume is to be
underlined. ^
3 The Book Number of an oversized volume is to be overlined.
4 The Book Number of an abnormal volume is to be both
underlined and overlined.
5 In all the entries of a volume put in any other collection, an
appropriate collection symbol is to be put consistently above the
Class Number or below the Book Num^r.
In a public UbraTy, the sequence symbol may indicate the branch in which
the volume is housed; in a university or college library, the department in
which it is housed IRL4], and in a school library, the standard to which
it is assigned [RSI].
The symbol indicating collection should be inserted in all the Entries of
the volume concerned.
It must be remembered that the primary collection has no symbol.
106
CHAPTER EF
CONTINUED CARDS
.1 If an Entry is too long for one card, it is to be continued in
another card; Uic connecting phrase ‘continued in the next card' is
to be at the right end of the bottom-most line of the earlier card
and the connecting word ‘continued' is to be at the right end of the
top of the latter card. Further the Leading Section is to be
repeated in all continued cards. The sequence of such cards
may be referred to as a set of ‘Continued Cards.’
2 A sequence of Main Entries of periodical publications,
having the same class number in their respective Leaihng Sections,
written in different cards because of break in the set, or change of
name or any other of the causes covered by Rule PA2 is also to be
treated as a set of ‘Continued Cards.’
3 If a set of ‘Continued Cards’ consists of three or more cards,
the first card is to have the connecting phrase at the bottom only;
the last card is to have the connecting word at the top only and
the intermediate cards are to have the connecting words at the
top as well as at the bottom.
4 The ‘Continued Cards’ are to be numbered serially, the
serial number being written after the connecting word 'continued'
near the top of the card.
107
CHAPTER EG
ARRANGEMENT OF ENTRIES
IN CLASSIFIED PART
1 By Class Numbers •
1 The entries in the Classified Part are to be arranged by the
Class Numbers in their respective Leading Sections.
The ordinal arrangement of Class Numbers would depend on the Scheme
of Classification used. If the Colon Classification is used, the ordinal arrange-
ment is governed by Rules 024, 025 and 0251 of the Colon classification.
11 Main and Cross Reference Entries
2 The entries having the same Class Number in their respec-
tive Leading Sections are to be arranged among themselves in
accordance with the succeeding Rules.
Such entries will be either Main Entries of works dealing chiefly with the
specific subject represented by the Class Number in question or Cross Reference
Entries of works dealing with it in a subsidiary way.
2 Main Entries
21 Among the entries with the same Class Number in their
respective Reading Sections, those with one or more Book
Numbers are to have precedence over those without them.
The result of this Rule is to separate the Main Entries and Cross Reference
Entries, relating to a given specific subject and to give precedence to the
former group.
22 Entries with Book Numbers in their respective Leading
Sections are to be arranged among themselves by the Book
Numbers.
The ordinal arrangement of Book Numbers would depend on the System
of Book Numbers used. If the Colon Classification is used, the ordinal
arrangement is governed by Rules 03015 and 03016 of the Colon classification.
108
EmiUES m CXASSIFIED PART EG4
23 The position of a consolidated Main Entry is to be deter*
mined by the last Book Number in it.
24 Entries with the same Class Numbers as well as Book
Numbers in their respective Leading Sections will be a sequence
of “continued” entries and they are to be arranged among them-
selves in their numerical sequence.
*3 Cross Reference Entries
31 Entries with the same Class Number and without Book
Numbers in their respective Leading Sections are to be arranged
among themselves by the Book Numbers, if any. in their respective
Third Sections.
The result of this rule is that the Cross Reference Entries for a given specific
subject will get grouped by the languages of the works cross-referred and
those in each language group will get arranged chronologically by the year
of publication of the book to which reference is made.
32 Such of the entries coming under rule 31 of this Chap as
have the same Book Numbers in their respective Third Sections,
are to be arranged among themselves by the Class Numbers
occurring in their respective Third Sections.
This is simply one convenient way of making the arrangement definite.
4 Periodical Publications
Entries with no Book Numbers in their Leading Sections and
no Class Numbers in their respective Third Sections, but with the
same Class Number in their respective Leading Sections will be
a sequence of “continued'’ entries of a Periodical Publication; and
they arc to be arranged among themselves in their numerical
sequence.
The result of this rule is that the entries for a given periodical publication
will get arranged in their natural sequence.
109
CHAPTER EH
ARRANGEMENT OF ENTRIES
IN ALPHABETICAL PART
1 By Alphabet •
1 The entries in the Alphabetical Part are to be arranged
strictly by the alphabet, as in a dictionary and in conformity with
the succeeding rules of tUs chapter.
The possibility and advantages of ruthless all>through alphabetisation are
examined in the paper on Alphabetical arrangement [RAl].
2 Initial Articles
2 In the alphabetical arrangement no attention is to be paid
to initial articles.
3 Undant
31 German words spelt with the vowels a, o, and u are to be
arranged as if they were spelt, a, o, and u respectively.
The help of Cross Reference Index Entry is to be sought to link up
umlauted vowel with its representation with an ‘e’, by the application of
SecLA3.
4 Scotti^ Names
Scottish names with the prefix Mac and its abbreviated forms
such as Me and M’ are to be arranged according to their apparent
alphabetical make-up.
The help of Cross Reference Index Entry is to be sought to link up the
prefixes Mac, Me, and M’ by the application of the Sec LA3.
5 ‘Saint’ and its Variants
Names beginning with St and Ste are to be treated on the
analogy of Rule 4 of this Chap.
110
BNTIUES IN ALFHABBTICAL PART
EH72
6 Superior Comma
The superior comma in a Scottkh or Irish name or in a
possessive case is to be ignored.
7 Gestalt Alphabetisation
70 The following ascending scale of ordinal values is to be
borne in mind in arranging the entries in the Alphabetical Part:
1 Section space;
2 Full stop;
3 Comma;
4 Numerals in their natural sequence ;
5 Bracket;
6 Words in Roman;
7 Words in italics, or underlined words ;
8 The word “and”, or its substitute semicolon; and
91 Etc.
71 Certain Terms
The priority of Section Space over Full Stop may be called the Rule of
^'Section before Full Stop,” Similarly we can speak of the “Rule of Full
Stop before Comma”; the Rule of “Comma before Bracket,” the Rule of
“Bracket before Words in Roman,” and Rule of “Words in Roman before
Words in Italics or underlined,”
72 Abandonment of the Rule of “Nothing before Something”
The above prescription omits the Rule of “Nothing before Something,”
followed in other methods of arrangement. It has to be omitted on account
of the uncertainty and the inconsistency with which authors and other persons
write a word in their names either as a single word or as two or more words
with empty space between them, or with hyphens between them. This
phenomenon is described fully in Sec HC5 and its Subdivisions. For exam-
ple, one and the same name may occur in the same list in any of the following
three forms:
1 Sivasankaranarayana.
2 Siva-Sankara-Narayana.
3 Siva Sankara Narayana.
The “Nothing before Something” rule will scatter these three entries. At
the same time, a person who looks up the Alphabetical list cannot be sure in
which of these three forms his reference is likely to be found. It is for these
111
EH72 CLASSIFIED Catalogue code
reasons that the Rule of '^Nothing before Something” has been abandoned
in this edition,
73 Traditional Method of Alphabetisation
It has been usual to direct that homonymous words and phrases should
be arranged among themselves according to their meaning, say, in the sequence :
1 Names of places;
2 Names of subjects;
3 Names of books ;
4 Names of things; and
5 Names of persons.
But such a direction implies deliberation of a delicate nature during
alphabetisation, which ought to be a purely mechanical affair {RT8]. In
this Code, absolute mechanisation of arrangement is sought to be secured by
specifying the Rules of Writing and the Rules of Alphabetisation in a fully
integrated manner. This is indeed an attempt to apply the Gestalt Theory
of Alphabetisation enunciated in the Theory of library catalogue,
74 Oscillation between Extremes
In the first three editions of this Code, the Gestalt Principle was imple-
mented to a severe degree. Between 1951, the year of edition 3 and now,
some re-thinking has been done. As a kind of extreme swing away from the
severe Gestalt Alphabetisation, the All-through Alphabetisation was practised.
The Documentation Section of the Indian Standards Institution established a
Standard on the basis of the latter. In this standard, arrangement is to be
guided only by what is visible. For example “Mac” and “Me” are not to
be equated at all. It also refused to give different ordinal values to the
dilferent styles of writing. In the Indian Standards Convention held at
Madras in December 1957, these two extreme positions were reviewed. It
was decided that what could be truly helpful to the users of an alphabetical
list, should be found somewhere midway between these two extremes.
75 Midway Position
The present edition of this Code has made an attempt to find this midway
position. The Rules on the Style of Writing given in Chap ED, and the
Rules on Alphabetical Arrangement given in this Chap are so co-ordinated
as to implement that midway position.
76 Example
The combined effect of these two co-ordinated sets of Rules is illustrated
by the sequence in which the following entries get arranged. The Headings
alone are given in most cases. The word “Cambrije” has been improvised
just for purpose of illustration.
1 Cambridge.
Three hundred years’ progress.
112
ENTRIES m ALPHABETICAL PART
EH76
2 Cambridoe.
See also
Cambrue.
3 Cambridge, Bibliography.
4 Cambridge, Education Committee.
5 Cambridge, Geography.
6 Cambridge, Library Committee.
7 Cambridge, Taxation Committee.
8 Cambridge, Pseud,
9 Cambridge (City).
10 Cambridge (City), Library Committee.
1 1 Cambridge (Duke of) 1 .
1 2 Cambridge (Duke of) 2.
13 Cambridge (John).
Aesthetics.
14 Cambridge (John).
Metaphysics.
15 Cambridge (John), Drama.
16 Cambridge (John), Philosophy.
17 Cambridge (John), Ed,
1 8 Cambridge (John), Tr,
19 Cambridge (John) and Ross (E B).
20 Cambridge (John) and Ross (E B), Ed,
21 Cambridge (John) and Smith (John).
22 Cambridge (Massachusetts).
23 Cambridge Archaeological Society.
24 Cambridge Gown.
25 Cambridge Philosophical Society.
26 Cambridgeshire.
27 Cambridge Trophy.
28 Cambrue.
29 New Shakespeare Society.
30 New South Wales.
31 Newall(JT).
32 Newark.
33 New York.
34 New Zealand.
35 Shivasankar/Cnarayana Ayyar (Ramanathan).
36 Shiva-Sankara-Narayana Ayyar (Subramaniyam).
37 Shiva Sankara Narayana Ayyar iruvcllore).
38 Shivasankaranarayana Pillai.
In alphabetical works of reference such as Wftd*s who and Telephone
directory^ punctuation marks and italics are not likely to occur. Therefore,
the compromise between strict All-through and Gestalt arrangements is not
likely to cause any serious difficulty to the users of such reference works.
113
8
EH8 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
8 Guide Card
In the Alphabetical Part, one guide card for about every three inches may
prove sufficient. The Classified Part must be guided more profusely. The
fact that the guide cards should be separated sufficiently so as to stand out
distinctly is the only limiting factor. Subject to this, every possible Class
should be guided. Even this limiting factor may be evaded to some extent
by putting an inclusive class on the tab and featuring its subclasses in two
or three columns on the body of the card to which the tab is affixed.
114
JPART F
XERMINOLOOY
CHAPTER FA
WORK
1 Knowledge-Unit. — An assumed term.
It may extmd in print to several volumes at one extreme or to only a single
sentence or even a single word at the other extreme. For example, the
Knowledge-Units, contained in and denoted by the following, stand arranged
in the decreasing sequence of size:
1 En^rclopaedia of general knowledge;
2 Encyclopaedia of library science;
3 This book \istXl— Classified catalogue code with additional rules for
dictionary catalogue code;
4 Part F of this book — ^Terminology (of cataloguing);
5 Chap FA of this book— Terms connected with “Work”; and
6 The definition given in the Sec in the first line of this Chap.
2 llioaglit. — Knowledge-unit.
This term is introduced for brevity. We often speak of the Thought-
Content of a book or of the work that it embodies.
21 Macro Thought and Micro Thought. — These are relative
terms, with meanings loosely fixed by convention. Examples 1,
2, and 3 given under Sec FAl may be taken to denote Macro
Thought. And examples 4, 5, and 6 may be taken to denote
Micro Thought. Ordinarily, a book greater in size than a
pamphlet may be said to embody Macro Thought. So also, a
pamphlet, an article in a periodical, a section of a book, a picture,
or a map, may be s^aid to embody Micro Thought.
3 Expressed Thought. — Thought expressed in language, or
symbols, or in any other mode, and thereby made communicable.
The above definition itself is Expressed Thought. It is expressed in the
English language. A picture is also Expressed Thought. A mathematical
or a chemical formula is again Expressed Thought. A gesture is equally an
Expressed Thought.
117
FA4
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
4 Work. — ^Expressed thought.
This term is introduced for brevity and elegance.
41 Abridgement. — Reduced form of a work got by condensa-
tion and/or omission of details, but retaining the whole general
sense and the unity of the original work.
For example. Chap 1 of my Library numual gives an Abridgement of my
work entitled Five laws of library science.
42 Adaptation. — ^A version of a work, re-writtcn for a parti-
cular purpose, but not so changed as to be deemed an independent
work on the basis of the quality of its thought and expression. The
Adaptation may be either in the language of the original work or
in any other language.
For example, the chapter on Cataloguing in my Library manual is an
Adaptation of the work contained in this book, for use in small libraries.
So also, the chapter on Classification in my Library manual is an Adaptation
of the work contained in my Colon classification and of the work
contained in the Decimal classification. The Ramayana of Kamban may
appear to be an Adaptation of the Ramayana of Valmiki. But it is an inde-
pendent work on account of its own individualistic quality of thought and
expression. So also, the Bengali and the English versions of the Gitanjali of
Tagore should be taken as independent works and not as Adaptations of
each other.
5 Sacred Work. — Basic work of a religion, generally accepted
as such among its followers.
Vedas, Upaniskads, Tantras, Tripitakas, Talmud, Bible, New Testament,
and Koran are examples. A Sacred Work is often treated as if it were a class
or subject. To distinguish such a class or subject from a normal class or
subject, it is called a quasi-class or quasi-subject. Bach part of a Sacred
Work is also treated as a quasi-class which is a subclass of it. Chains of such
subclasses of it are usually enumerated in an articulated sequence.
6 Work of Literature. — Work in the form of a poem, drama,
fiction, prose, champu, or any other literary form, of which the
outstanding qualities are taken to be beauty of form, emotional
or intuitional appeal, and endless layers of suggestions in regard
118
WORK FA91
to meaning, and/or which is of intuitive or trans-intellectual
origin.
For example, Ramayana, Iliad, Sakuntda, Canterbury tales, Handet, Hound
of heaven. Post office, and Apple cart arc Works of Literature. A work of
Literature is treated as if it were a class or a subject. That is, it is regarded
as a quasi-dass or quasi-subject.
7 Classic. — Work usually having embodiments in several
versions, adaptations, and translations, attracting other works on
itself, and getting copied out and/or brought out in print even
long after its origin.
For example, Aristotle*s Poetics, Newton’s Principia and Marx’s Capital
are Classics. A Classic too is often treated as if it were a class or a subject.
That is, it is regarded as a quasi-class or quasi-subject.
8 Quasi-Class. — Work which is treated as a class in a classi-
fication scheme, or whose title is used as a subject-heading in
cataloguing practice.
As we have seen in Sec FAS, FA6 and FA7, a Quasi-Class is usually
a Sacred Work, or a Work of Literature, or a Classic. Such works are usually
governed by special rules in a Cataloguing Code.
91 Pedestrian Work.— Work not eligible to be made into a
Quasi-Class or a Quasi-Subject.
Most of the works published today arc Pedestrian Works. They are not
Sacred Works of religion. Nor are they Classics. All works passing
for poems, dramas, or any other form of work of literature may not, in reality,
deserve to be treated as Quasi-Classes or Quasi-Subjects. Some may be
only Pedestrian Works. And yet, it is the practice in cataloguing to treat
them as if they arc Quasi-Classes or Quasi-Subjects. This is because the
line of demarcation between a true Work of Literature and a Pedestrian
Work in verse, drama or any other literary form is not sharp enough. To
distinguish them and treat them as Pedestrian Works would amount to a
violation of the Canon of Reticence on the part of the classifiers or the cata-
loguers as the case may be. However, a poem whose value is the exposition
of Positive Knowledge, need not be taken as poetry. So also with other
forms of exposition.
119
CHAPTER FB
TITLE
1 Title,— Name of work.
For example, Classified catalogue code with additional rules for dictionary
catalogue code is the Title of the work contained in this book.
2 Subtitle, — A secondary or subordinate title usually explana-
tory, and forming part of the title.
For example, in the full title of my book Heading and canons: Comparative
study of five catalogue codes, the part Comparative study of five catalogue
codes is Subtitle.
3 Alternative Title.— A subtitle introduced by “or” or its
equivalent, and forming part of the title.
For example, in the full title of my work, contained in the book Social
bibliography or physical bibliography for librarians, authors, and publishers^
the part Physical bibliography for librarians, authors, and publishers is Alter-
native Title.
4 Short Title or Abbreviated Title. — The name of a work,
more brief than its full title, without prejudice to intelligibility
and help in identifying the work.
For example. Library development plan is the Abbreviated Title of my work
contained in the book with the title Library development plan, with draft
library bills for the Union Government and the Constituent States.
Generally speaking, initial words other than an article, — such as, Elements,
Handbook, Introduction, Primer and Treatise — may havcjo be preserved.
5 Half-Title. — Title, usually short, given on the page of a
printed book, usually found before the page containing the full
title of the work contained in the book.
For example, ‘‘Classified Catalogue Code” is printed as the Half-Title of
the work contained in this book. It is so printed in the half-title-page which
is on the recto of the leaf preceding the title-leaf.
120
■nTLE , FB93
6 Rnniiiiig Htte. — Short title usually found printed in the top
line of each verso page or all the pages of a book.
%
For example, ^‘Classified Catalogue Code” is printed as Running Title
in the top of each verso page of this book.
7 Binder's Title. — Short title usually found tooled on the
spine of a book.
For example, “Classified Catalogue Code” is tooled on the spine of this
book as the Binder*s Title.
8 Tell-Tale Title.— Title that discloses the subject of the work.
For example, the title of this book is a Tell-Tale Title.
91 Uniformised Title. -Title uniformiscd by popular or
cataloguing usage in lieu of listless, and often unintended, variants
of the title of one and the same work in different editions or the
titles of different volumes of one and the same work.
For example, the work which had for its original title Code civil des Frangtds
was later given the title Code Napoleon. It is helpful to use one uniform title
for it in the place of its variants. Generally, a Sacred Book of a religion is
given slightly varying titles from time to time, without any significance.
There is therefore a need for adopting a Uniformised Title for it. Bible^
Vedas, and Talmud are examples of such Uniformised Titles. The same
thing happens also in the case of Classics and Works of Literature. Many
Governmental and other Annual Reports change their titles listlessly. For
example, it may be Administration report on agriculture in one year. Annua/
report on agriculture in another year, and Review of agriculture in a still another
year. This is also a case where a Uniformised Title is called for. Uni-
formisation of the title may also be necessary in respect of a Periodical Con-
ference. This is a case in which the Canon of Ascertainability is not followed
rigidly.
•
92 Fanciful Title. ■ -Title that does not disclose the subject of
the work.
93 Proper Name Title. — Either a Fanciful Title or a Title
beginning with a Proper Noun and for this or other reason having
the status of a Proper Name.
121
FB93 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
For example, the title Library cheque-book of five leaves^ which is the name
of a work of mine given as an address to the German Library Confeienoe
in Berlin in 1956 and published as an article in the Oranthalaya, the organ of
the Hyderabad Library Association, in the same year, is a Fanciful Title
or a Proper Name Title. For, its thought-content is my Five Laws of Library
Science. This subject of the work is hot disclosed by its title. In fact, most
of the people in the conference felt intrigued by the title announced for my
address, until they listened to the address. A title like Oxford book of
English prose y which contains a proper noun, may also be taken to be a Proper
Name Title.
94 Title Proper of a Periodical Publication. — Includes the
name of the sponsor if it occurs at the beginning and excludes
it if it occurs at the end.
Examples:
1 AsHb proceedings.
2 Library Association record.
3 Unesco bulletin for libraries.
4 Annals only in the case of the Annals of the Indian Library
Association.
5 Journal only in the case of the Journal of the Indian Mathe-
matical Society.
6 Transactions only in the case of the Transactions of the Royal
Society.
122
CHAPTER FC
%
AUTHOR
1 Person.— An assumed term.
2 Corporate Body. —
Sense 1 A number of persons taken collectively— usually
as united, or organised, or coming together informally, in a
common cause or for common action such as governmental
business, or commercial or industrial or service or political or
any other business, or for deliberation, or for collective expression
of opinion or statement.
Sense 2 A number of corporate bodies, in sense 1, taken
collectively — usually as united, or organised, or coming together
informally, in a common cause or for common action such as
governmental business, or commercial or industrial or service
or political or any other business, or for deliberation, or for
collective expression of opinion or statement.
For example. Government of India, Madras Chamber of Commerce,
Union of Textile Mill Owners of Coimbatore, Ramakrishna Mission, Indian
National Congress, Indian National Trade Union Congress, Constituent
Assembly of India, Villagers’ Gathering at Ubhiavedantapuram, District
Board of Tanjavur, Corporation of Madras, Panchayat Board of Siricali,
Madras Library Association, Indian Mathematical Society, and Old Boys’
Association of the Hindu High School (Sirkali) are corporate Bodies in sense 1 .
United Nations, Afro>Asian Conference, International Federation of
Library Associations, Federation of Indian Chambers of Commerce, Inter-
University Board of India, and Commonwealth Universities’ Conference
are Corporate Bodies in sense 2.
21 Organ bf a Corporate Body. — Non-autonomous part of
a corporate body formed by
1 The constitution of the parent body; or
2 A legislative, executive, or administrative measure, for
administrative or deliberative work for an indefinite period,
within the field of function of the parent body; or
3 A legislative, or executive, or administrative measure for
123
FC21
CLASSIHED CATALOGUB CODE
a specific piece of work for a specified duration^ within the field
of function of the parent body.
211 Constitutional Organ.— Organ of the category 1 men*
tioned in Sec FC 21.
212 Administrative Organ. — ^Organ of the category 2 men-
tioned in Sec FC 21.
213 Permanent Organ. — Organ of the categories 1 or 2
mentioned in Sec FC 21.
214 Tenqmrary Organ. — Organ of the category 3 mentioned
in Sec FC 21.
215 Organ of the First Remove. — Organ intrinsic to the
constitution of the parent body.
216 Organ of the Second Remove. — Organ of any organ of
the first remove.
217 Organ of the Third Remove. — Organ of any organ of the
second remove.
218 Organ is itself a corporate body.
For example, 1 The President of India, the Parliament of India, the Supreme
Court of India, the Governor of Madras, the Madras Legislative Assembly,
the High Court of Madras, the Madras Council of Ministers, the Senate, the
Academic Council, the Syndicate, and the Faculties of the Vikram University,
the Council of the Madras Library Association are all Constitutional Organs
of their respective parent bodies.
2 The Ministry of Education of the Government of India, the Library
Committee of the Vikram University, the Publication Committee of the
Madras Library Association, the Reception Committee of the Indian Mathe-
nmtical Conference of 1957, and the Professors* Council of the Vivekananda
College are Administrative Organs of their respective parent bodies.
4 The Indian Taxation Enquiry Commission of 1956 was a Temporary
Organ of the Government of India.
6 The Privileges Committee of the Lok Sabha is an Organ of the Second
Remove of the Government of India.
*
7 The Subcommittee of the Privileges Committee, and the Advisory
Committee for Secondary Education of the Ministry of Education are Organs
of the Third Remove of the Government of India.
22 Goyenunent. —
Sense 1 Corporate body with full or limited sovereign
power over a territory. It has generally functions of execution,
124
AUTHOR
FC24
legislation, justice, and administration. Other functions, such
as defence, taxation, regulation of commerce, public transport,
cohimunication etc, will vary with the degree of limitation in
the sovereign power.
Sense 2 Local Authority in charge of the regulation,
promotion, and/or provision of specified local public services in
an area, under power delegated by the government within the
territory of which its own area lies, and with a defined extent
of autonomy.
Sense 3 Organ of Government in sense 1 or 2 defined
above.
For example, 1 the Government of India, the Government of Madras,
and the Government of the United Kingdom are Governments in sense 1.
2 The District Board of Tanjavur, the Corporation Madras, and the
Panchayat Board of Sirkali are Governments in sense 2.
3 The President of India, the Parliament of India, the Supreme Court
of India, the Council of Ministers of Madras, and the Council of the Corpo-
ration of Madras are Governments in sense 3.
23 Institution. —
Sense 1 Independent or autonomous corporate body
other than a government. It may be created by a government,
or constituted under a statute, or formed voluntarily — either
formally or informally. It has or it is intended to have continued
existence and functions beyond that of merely convening a
conference.
Sense 2 Organ of an Institution in sense 1 defined above.
For example, the Madras Library Association is an Institution in sense 1.
And the Council of the Madras Library Association is an Institution in
sense 2. Instances of autonomous bodies are discussed in Part G.
24 Conference. — Sense 1 Ad hoc assembly for deliberation
or formulation and expression of opinion or sentiments
1 Not convened by
11 A Government and made up solely of its own per-
sonnel or as a Constituent Assembly to form a Sovereign State,
or
125
FC24
CXJ^SSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
12 An Institution and made up solely of its members
or as a Foundation Assembly to form an Institution, or
13 More than one Government jointly and confin^
solely to their own personnel, or
14 More than one Institution jointly and confined
solely to their members;
2 Convened and conducted by
21 A number of persons and/or corporate bodies, spon-
taneously, to consider matters of common interest, or
22 A body with no function or existence beyond the
conference convened and held by it, or
23 A body with only the convening and holding of
conferences at intervals, as its primary function.
For example, the Indian Mathematical Conference of 1957 is a
Conference in sense 1. The Reception Committee of the Indian Mathenta-
tical Conference of 1957 is a Conference is sense 2.
241 Organ Conference. — Any category of Assembly ex-
cluded from the definition of a Conference in Sec FC4. It is
an Organ of the Corporate body (ies) convening it.
3 Anthor of a Work. —
Sense 1 Person creating the work, that is, the thought and
the expression constituting it.
Sense 2 Corporate body owning responsibility for a work
that is, for the thought and the expression constituting it.
31 Personal Author. — ^Person as author, the responsibility
for the thought and the expression constituting the work resting
solely on his private capacity and not on the capacity of any
office being held by him within a corporate body, nor on the
capacity of that body.
For example, S R Ranganathan is the Personal Author of ed 4 of the work
contained in this book, although he holds the office of President of the Madras
Library Association which sponsored that edition. For, the responsibility
for the thought and the expression constituting the work rests solely on him
in his private capacity, and not at all on the Madras Library Association or on
him in his official capacity as its President.
32 Corporate Auffior. — ^Corporate body as author, the
responsibility for the thought and expression constituting the
126
AUTHOR FC6
work resting solely on it or any organ of it, and not on the private
capacity of any person or persons forming part of or heading
o^ce in or in any other way connected with that body.
For example, 1 the Library Committee of the University of Rangoon is
the Corporate Author of the Catalogue of periodicals in the University and
other libraries of Rangoon^ 1937, though it might have been actually compiled
by the librarian of that University.
2 The work contained in the book entitled Rulings of S Satyamurti, the
Mayor of Madras^ 1940, does not have Satyamurti as its personal author.
But it is of Corporate Authorship. The Author is the Mayor of Madras.
As the Mayor of Madras is elected only for a period of one year, it had been
necessary to add the name of Satyamurti also, not as name of the personal
author, but as a means of individualising the particular Mayor who gave the
Rulings. The Rulings were given not in his private capacity, but only in the
capacity of Mayoral Office.
3 The work contained in the book Despatch including a report as to irri*
gation projects on the Upper Nile^ 1901, by the Agent and Consul^ieneral
of Great Britain in Cairo is of Corporate Authorship and not of personal
authorship. For the Despatch was written by the gentleman working as the
Agent of the Government of Great Britain iii Cairo not in his private capacity
but in his corporate capacity as an organ of the Government of Great Britain.
4 Compiler, — Author, personal, or corporate, making up a
work by collecting information from various sources and arrang-
ing them in a particular way.
For example, the so called compiler of the Concordance to the Bible^ or of the
Concordance to Keats, or of a Directory, or of a Who’s Who, or of any other
kind of serial is in reality its Author.
5 Joint Authors.— Two or more authors, personal or
corporate, sharing responsibility for the thought and expre-
ssion constituting the work, the portion for which each is
separately responsible not being either specified or separable.
•
For example, the responsibility for the thought and expression constituting
the work contained in the book Library mannual, 1951, by S R Ranganathan
and K M Sivaraman is shared by the two authors. The portion for which
each is separately responsible is neither specified in the work nor is it separable.
Therefore this work is of Joint Authorship.
6 Pseudonymous Author.— An author assuming a false or
fitcitious name or any other specification different from the real
127
FC6
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
name. A pseudonym may also be given by others to an author
or it may even get started in a casual way, either in his own time
or in later times. ^
The motive for the suppression of the real name may be various — diffidence;
sense of shame; fear of consequences; freakishness; joking, mystifying, or
hoaxing instinct; and so on. 1 myself used the pseudonym ‘Arithmeticus*
in an article to the Educational review of Madras in 1922, and the pseudonym
‘Libra’, made up of the first five letters of the word ‘Librarian*, in articles
contributed in 1931 to the Hindu^ a daily of Madras, as it was found expedient
not to disclose my identity. While the psychology of such motives may be of
interest for its own sake, it is not directly relevant to cataloguing. But the
various degrees, to which the element of fiction and concealment is introduced
in the pseudonym assumed or given, are not without interest.
1 At one extreme, there is the adoption or the gift of what appears like
a regular name, though different from the real name. George Eliot is an
example.* The author’s real name might have been forgotten and he may be
remembered by some other name.
2 Secondly, the words constituting the real name may be permuted. For
example, Arthur Travers Crawford used the pseudonym T C Arthur.
3 Thirdly, the letters in the essential word in the real name or in all or some
of its words may be permuted. For example, Anne Lake wrote under the
pseudonym Ekalenna. While such anagrams occur at alt times, there appear
to be some periods in the history of each community when the anagrammatic
mood is in an epidemic phase.
4 Fourthly, the anagram may involve the omission of some of the letters.
5 Fifthly, the real name may be disfigured by the inteipolation of letters
or words among the legitimate letters and words.
6 Sixthly, the real name may be replaced by the initial letter of its words,
or their end-letters, or by any combination of these, with or without inter-
vening punctuation marks. When the initial letters are strung together, they
are said to form Initionym, For example, Edward Hamilton Aitken adopted
the initionym Eha. Pronounceable initionyms are nowadays frequently
used to denote corporate bodies. Here are a few examples:
Uno= United Nations Organisation. ,
Une$co= United Nations Educational Scientific and Cultural Organisation. '
Ifla^ International Federation of Library Associations.
Afla— Asian Federation of Library Associations.
lnsdoc»= Indian National Scientific Documentation Centre.
Scapa— Society for Checking the Abuses of Public Advertising.
Socony— Standard Oil Company of New York.
7 Seventhly, a single pseudonym may be used to represent two or more
joint authors; and conversely, a double pseudonym may be used to represent
128
AUTHOR
FC61
a single author^ producing the illusion of joint authorship. For example^
the two joint authors 1 Zangwill and L Cowen used the pseudonym *J Freeman
Be^;.
8 Eighthly, the same pseudonym may be used by different authors; and
conversely, the same author may assume diderent pseudonyms for differ^t
works of his. Voltaire is reported to have used 137 pseudonyms, and Frank-^
lin 57 pseudonyms.
9 Ninthly, the real name may be replaced by the name of place of birth,
place of residence, nationality, or profession; academic or titular distinctions;
real or assumed relationship; horoscopic peculiarities; personal peculiarities;
political leanings; authorship of previous publications; pictures or diagrams;
and in every other conceivable way.
61 Unmasking of Pseudonyms
The unmasking of fictitious names and anonymity is a recognised field for
bibliographical and cultural scholarship.
Germany appears to have been one of the first countries to devote attention
to this problem. Two results are:
1 Placcii (Vincentii). Theatrum anonymonim ct pseudonymorum.
1708.
2 Mylius (Johenn Christoph). Bibliotheca anonymonim et pseu-
donymorum detcctorum. 2 V. 1740.
France soon followed with
1 Barbier (Antoine Alexandre). Dictionnaire des ouvrages anonymes
et pseudonymes. 4 V, 1806
2 Querard (Joseph Marie) Les superchcries litteraires devoilees. 7 V.
Italy was later provided with
1 Melzi (Gaetano). Dizionario di opere anonime e pseudonime di
scrittori italiani. 3 V. 1848
The Scandinavian countries own jointly
1 Collin (E). Anonymer og pseudonymer. 1869.
The Netherlands has been supplied by
1 Doominck (Jan Izaac van). Vermonde en naamlooze schrijvers
opgespoord op het gebiet. 2 V. 1883
The Anglo-Saxon ccRintries are armed with the following publications;
1 Halkett (Samuel) and Laing (John). Dictionary of anonymous and
pseudonymous English literature. 7 V. 1926-32.
2 Stonehill (Charles A) etc. Anonyma and pseudonyma. 4 V.
1926.
3 Taylor (Archer) and Mosher (Frederic J). Bibliographical history
of anonyma and pseudonyma. 1951.
The Indian languages are yet to be provided with such bibliographical tools.
129
9
FC7 CLASSIFIED CATiU.OGUE CODE
7 ABMqmoiis Woik.— Work of unknown authorship either
personal or corporate.
Many of the sacred books are anonymous. Some of the clas^ of old
are also anonymous. A few pedestrian books also occasionally come out
anonymously. In the German library practice, a work of corporate author-
ship also is treated as an anonymous work.
130
CHAPTER FD
’ft
COLLABORATOR AND SPONSOR
1 Cdlabwator. — Person or corporate body associated with
a work and/or its author or authors in a secondary capacity not
amounting to authorship — ^for example, director, guide, assistant,
commentator, illustrator, engraver, translator, reviser, editor,
reporter, writer of introduction or foreword, epitomiser, adapter,
libratist, writer of the words in a musical composition, writer
of the words in a pictorial book.
For example, in the work contained in the book Manual of chemical tech-
nology (1904) by Rudolf Von Wagner, it is stated that the work was revised
by Ferdinand Fischer, that it was translated from the German edition 13 by
William Crookes, and that it was also edited by the same Crookes. We
therefore say that Fischer and Crookes are collaborators associated with the
work contained in the book in secondary capacities not amounting to
authorship.
2 Sponsor. — Person or corporate body with whose good
will, authority, or finance or under whose auspices a work is
published, though the responsibility for the thought and the ex-
pression constituting the work does not at all rest with the said
person or corporate body, but rests solely on the author of the
work as a whole or on the respective authors of the different
contributions in the work.
A sponsor is not author. But a periodical publication is often traced by a
reader through the name of its sponsor. This tradition is more than a century
old. Cataloguing practice has to strive hard to get away from the tradition
of treating the sponsor as if he were the author.
131
CHAPTER FE
DOCUMENT
1 Embodied Thought -Record of work on paper or other
material, fit for physical handling, transport across space, and
preservation through time.
This book itself is Embodied Thought. It is recorded on paper by the
process of printing. The record is bound in stiff board in order to make it
fit for physical handling. Because it is so embodied, it is possible to send it
to any part of the world. If it be not embodied as a record, it will soon be
forgotten; and the work embodied in it cannot be preserved through time
accurately, or preserved at all. The work known as the Vedas was not
recorded in a document, for a long, long time. It could therefore be com-*
municated to others in those far off days only by word of mouth. It could
not therefore be known all through the world in those days, as it is today after
being embodied in a document. Again it has to be handed down from gene-
ration to generation only through word of mouth. This had necessarily
led to hundreds of versions of the same work. So it was with the ancient
epic poems the Ramayana and the Iliad,
Such ancient works were first recorded on materials such as leaves, silk
cloth, and stones. Later they came to be recorded on other materials and
finally on paper. But even then, enough copies could not be produced
economically for being sent out to many distant places. The invention of
printing from movable metallic types and the continuous improvement of
it have led to the overcoming of all such difficulties.
2 Document. —Embodied thought.
This term is introduced for brevity. It was brought into use a few decades
ago to emphasise embodied micro thought. It is now extended in use to
include any embodied thought, micro or macro.
I#
3 Macro DocnineDt. — Usually a work expressing macro
thought is embodied into a document all by itself. Such a
document may be called Macro Document.
4 Micro Document. — Usually a work expressing micro
thought is not embodied into a document all by itself. Several
micro documents are embodied in one and the same document.
132
DOCUMENT FES
Then we say that the several Micro Documents are clubbed
tocher in a single macro document.
'S Host Document. — macro document is called the Host
Document for each of the micro documents embodied in it.
For example, a periodica] is a macro document. Each article in it is a
micro document. The periodical is the Host Document for each of the articles
contained in it. So also, a book is the Host Document for each of its chapters
and sections, which may be looked upon as micro documents.
6 Locus. — The Host Document in which a Micro Document
occurs and its exact position within it.
For example, the Locus of the micro document Indian national biblu^raphy
by me is the Annals of library science. 4; 1957; 65-72 — that is pages 65 to 72
of volume 4, of the said periodical, which was published in 1957.
7 Volume. — Several leaves of paper or other material used
for recording, cither the whole or a part of a work, fastened
together so as to be opened at any desired place.
A volume is an independent physical unit.
8 Thought-Content. — Expressed thought embodied within
a document or a volume of it.
133
CHAPTER FF
KINDS OF DOCUMENTS
I Conventitnal Docmnent of Kind 1. — Document with paper
as basic material and with the work recorded on it in the phonetic
symbols fomung the script of an articulate natural or artificial
language, with or without illustrations used as a help in the
communication of the thought*content. The recording is done
by printing, or by some near-printing process; or the record is
a reproduction of the above or of the original manuscript of it
by photographic, chemical, or any other so-called mechanical
process, to a size more or less the same as that of the original.
For brevity, this may be denoted by the term Printed Botdr,
using it in a general sense.
The conventional book, the periodical publication, and a fascimile repro-
duction of either are common examples. This book is a Conventional Docu-
ment of Kind 1. The quarterly Anmds of library science is also so. A
facsmile copy of this book made by photographic process will also be a
Conventional Document of Kind 1.
I I Periodical Publication. — Conventional Document of Kind 1
with the following attributes:
1 A volume, or a small group of volumes of it, is intended
to be published or completed normally once in a year (or at
other regular intervals), though irregularity in interval is not
ruled out;
2 Each successive volume, or periodical group of volumes,
is usually distinguished by the year of publication and/or by a
number belonging to a system of simple or, complex ordinal
number. Such a number is usually called a Volume Number.
3 The intention had been to continue the publication of the
volumes for ever, though not actually carried out; and
4 The intention had been to continue the same title in all
the volumes, though not actually carried out.
The term Periodical Publication is also used to denote any
single volume of a Periodical Publication as defined above.
134
KINDS ae DoctnoNTS
FF2I
111 PotodkaL— Periodical publication of which eadi volume
is made up of distinct and independent contributions, not form-
ic a continuous exposition, normally by two or more persona!
authors and normally the specific subjects and the authors of
the contributions in successive volumes also being, in general,
dilferent, but all the subjects falling within one and the same
region of knowledge, contemplated to be brought mthin its
purview. It is not usually released complete as a volume but
only in fascicules or numbers, as they are called. It essentially
expounds knowledge and not repeat the same kind of information,
usually in the same pattern, in each of its volumes just bringing
the information up-to-date from volume to volume.
The term Periodica] is also used to denote any single volume
of a periodical as defined above.
Examples:
1 Annals of library science.
2 Proceedings, Royal Society of London.
3 Zeitschrift, Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft.
112 Serial. — Periodical publication of which each volume
or each periodical group of volumes embodies more or less
the same kind of information, usually in the same pattern, mainly
relating to its year (or other period) of coverage. It is usually
released complete as a volume. It is not made of diverse contri-
butions each forming a continuous exposition of knowledge.
The term Serial is also used to denote any single volume of
a serial as defined above.
Examples:
1 Annual report of the Director of Agriculture, Madras.
2 Madras telephone directory.
3 Statesman's^ year-book.
4 Who’s who in America.
5 Year-book of the Carnegie Institution of Washington.
21 Indexing Periodical. — A periodical giving a bare catalogue
of articles bearing on a stated subject and appearing in the
current fascicules of periodicals. It may also include bare
entries of books currently published.
135
FF21
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
Exitmpksi
1 Agricultural index.
2 Technical index.
3 Law index.
22 Abstracting Periodical. — A periodical giving a catalogue
of articles bearing on a stated subject and appearing in the
current fascicules of periodicals, each entry being provided with
an abstract of the article described by it. It may also include
annotated entries of books currently published.
Examples:
] Biological abstracts.
2 Library science abstracts.
3 Science abstracts: Electrical engineering.
23 Reviewiii^ Periodical. — A periodical giving in narrative
form an account of the contributions bearing on a stated subject
and appearing in the fascicules and the books published during
its period of coverage.
Examples:
1 Year’s work in librarianship.
2 Reports on progress in physics.
3 Annual review of biochemistry.
3 Book. — Conventional Document of Kind 1, other than
periodical publication — that is, it has been completed or has
been intended to be completed in a finite number of volumes.
It is generally in one volume. Some are in many volumes.
The above definition really connotes what is commonly understood by the
term Book. This book, for example, is a “Book” according to the above
definition.
31 Molti*Volumed Book. — Book in two or more volumes
giving a continuous exposition, and, for this or for any other
reason in the distribution of thought among the volumes, com-
pelling the treatment of all the volumes as an inseparable set,
I e as if they together formed a single volume.
Examples:
1 The book Principles of economics of Frank William Taus published
in two volumes in 1920.
136
KINDS OF DOCUMENTS FF6
2 The book Letters of Sir Waiter Scott, edited by H J C Orietson
and publisNd from 1932 onwards in several volumes.
The book Dictionary of the inorganic compounds edited by M K
Homnann and published in 1921 in four volumes. This book is said to
be in three volumes. But the first volume consists of two parts published
as independent volumes.
4 Conqposite Book. — Book with two or more contributions,
each with its own title, not forming a continuous exposition and
often, though not necessarily, by different authors.
41 Ordinary Composite Book. — Composite book provided
with a single, generic title to denote all the contributions
collectively.
Anthology of several authors, christomathy, hymn-book,
prayer-book, song-book, symposium, Festschrift and similar
compilations come under this category.
Examples:
1 The book Happy baby, published in 1926. It has contributions from
L Emmett Holt, Ralph Lo^nstine, Harvey J Burkhart, and Henry L K
Shaw.
2 The book University of Saint Andrews, Five-hundredth anniversary:
Memorial volume of scientific papers, published in 1911. This contains
contributions by several authors.
3 Science and religion, a symposium, published in 1931,
42 Artificial Composite Book. — Composite book without a
generic title to denote all the contributions collectively.
An Artificial Composite Book may be created by the publisher by issuing
two or more different books within one and the same cover, but without a
common title-page. U may also be created by a library by binding several
books together into a single volume.
5 Contribution. — Work forming a part of a composite book,
or a periodical, or a serial.
51 Article. — Contribution in a periodical.
52 Contributor. — Author of a contribution.
6 Simple Book. — Book which is not composite, that is
which embodies work by a single author or by joint authors.
It may also be anonymous.
This book is a Simple Book.
FF7 cxAssmsD catazxwue code
7 iBcmabala. — A book printed within a few decade of the
invention of modem printing — say in the fifteenth century.
$ Restricted field of this Code. — ^This code confines itself to the cataloguing
of convenitional books and periodical publications mentioned in Sec FFl to
FF 6 only. This restricts its field to modem books and periodicals without
any special features of physical bibliography needing description. In parti-
cular, it does not provide Rules for Descriptive Cataloguing or for the Cata-
loguing of Incunabula. These are of interest only to historical bibliographers
and not to ordinary readers. A Supplementary Code is necessary for each
of these excluded categories.
91 Conventional Document of Kind 2.— Document similar to
Conventional Document of Kind 1 but the recording being in
a non-conventional script, such as braille, stenograph, music
in notatoin, and cipher.
92 Conventional Document of Kind 3. — Document similar to
Conventional Document of Kind 1, except that the graphic
medium is not phonetic symbols but essentially drawings, pictures,
maps, and similar ones.
93 Conventional Document of Kind 4, — Document similar to
Conventional Document of Kind 1, but the recording being
done by handwriting. This is usually called Manuscript.
931 Non>Conveational Manuscript. — Manuscript using
material other than paper.
94 Non-Convmitional Document of Kind 1. — ^Photograph ie,
chemical, or any other so called mechanical reproduction of any
Kind of Conventional Document on an extremely reduced scale
needing the use of special reading apparatus.
Micro card, micro film, micro filmstrip and kindred materials are examples.
One micro card of size 12Sx7S mm may contain the reproduction of a
hundred pages of a normal book.
95 Reprograph. — Non-conventional document of kind 1 or
a photographic, chemical, or any other so-called mechanical
reproductions of any kind of conventional document to a size
more or less the same as that of the origina].
96 Non-Convmitional Document of Kind 2. — Document made
of sound-record, whether of articulate sound or of music. This
is called Audio Document.
138
KINDS OF DOCUMENTS FF99I
961 S^peakiog Bedi. — ^Printed book with a companion-
attachment of the sound-record of tim words in it.
97 Non-CoBTOitional Document of Kind 3. — Document made
of cinema reels. This is called Visnal Document.
98 NoD-ConT«Btional Document of Kind 4. — ^Document made
of talkie reels. This is called Audio-Visual Document.
991 Nmi-Conveational Document of Kind 5. — Document made
of record of natural or social phenomena made directly by an
instrument, without being passed through human mind and
without being woven into thought created and expressed by
human mind. This may be called Instrnmmit-Record of
Phmiomena.
An account of all these kinds of documents, and particularly of the new
kind called Instrument-Record of Phenomena will be found in a paper
entitled Document: Conventional and non-conventional [RD 2).
Supplementary Catalogue Codes are necessary for cataloguing each of the
varieties described in Sec FF7 and Sec FF91 to FF991 respectively. The
Rules in this Code form only the basic Rules for such documents.
139
CHAPTER FG
PRELIMINARY PAGES
1 Tide«Page. — ^Page, of a document or a volume of it,
containing its Title-Statement. Usually, it also contains the
Author-Statement, the Collaborator-Statement, and the Imprint.
It also indicates the Edition in many cases.
Page 3 of this book is its Title-Page.
2 Over-Flow of Title-Page. — Page (s) immediately succeeding
or preceding the title-page of a document or a volume of it and
containing part of the information usually given on the title-page
and/or some of the statements mentioned in Sec FL4, FL7
and FL81, and information about other additional factors such
as the Series to which the document may belong.
Pages 1, 2 and 4 form the Over-Flow of the Title-page of this book.
21 In the case of a Composite Book, Over-Flow of Title-
Page is deemed to include every page in which the names (s) of
the author (s) and collaborators and the title of any of the
contributions or constituent works, as the case may be, are found.
3 Title-Leaf. — ^The leaf of which the recto is the Title-Page.
In this book the verso of the title-leaf contains the Entry
Statement for Author, the Edition-Statement, and the Call
Number which is virtually the Subject-Statement.
4 Half-Title Page. — ^The recto of the leaf usually preceding
the title-leaf and containing the half-title of the document.
Page 1 of this book is its Half-Title Page. ,
5 Half-Title Leaf. — The leaf of which the recto is the Half-
Title Page.
140
CHAPTER FH
SERIES
1 Series. — A set of books, not constituting a multi-volumcd
book, and with the following attributes:
1 The books are issued, normally successively by one
publisher or by one sponsoring body or person, usually in a
uniform style, and having some similarity of subject or standard
or purpose;
2 Each book has normally a distinct and independent title
and/or other features of its own;
3 Each book has normally a different author;
4 There is a collective name to denote the set, called the
Name of the Series and given in all or at least in one of the books
of the set; and
5 Each book is or can be assigned a distinct number,
called the Serial Number. It may belong to a system of simple
or complex ordinal numbers such as 1, 2, 3, etc; 3.1, 3.2, 3.3,
etc; or 1957. 1, 1957.2, 1957.3, etc.
For example, this book belongs to the Ranganathan Series in Library
Science. Its serial number is 2. Other examples of Series are :
1 Broadway oriental library.
2 Cambridge tracts in mathematics and physics.
3 Library of philosophy.
4 Modem world series.
5 University of Delhi, library science series.
There is a list of such publishers* series, current in Great Britain, in the
earlier pages of the English catalogue of any year.
§
2 Pseudo-Series of Kind 1.— A set of books not constituting
a multi-volumed book and with the following attributes;
1 All the books are of common authorship;
2 All the books belong to the same edition in sense 2;
3 The title of each book has a distinctive part in addition
to the name of the edition in sense 2;
141
FH2
CLASSmSD CATAjpOOUE CXXIE
4 Each book is or can be assigned a Serial Nnnriier belong-
ing to a system simple or complex ordinal numbers; and
5 The name of the author taken along with the name*^of
the edition in sense 2 is suitable to be rised as if it were the Name
of a Series.
Extmgfk:
Consider the book, wdiose spine has the following words; Works of Leo
Tolstoy I Qiildhood, Boyhood and Youth / Centenary Edition / 3 / 1928.
It belongs to the Pseudo-series of Kind 1 . It may be named Tolstoy
(Leo). Centenary ed.
3 Pseudo-Series of Kind 2. — A set of books, not constituting
a multi-volumed book and with the following attributes:
1 All the books are of common authorship;
2 The titles of the various books have a common part
capable of being used as their common generic title;
3 The title of each book has a distinctive part of its own
in addition to the generic part;
4 Each book is or can be assigned a Serial Number belong-
ing to a system of simple or complex ordinal numbers; and
5 The name of the author taken along with the generic
title is suitable to be used as if it were the Name of a Series.
Exanyile:
Consider the book whose title-page reads as follow^: E Grimsehl /
Text-book of physics / Edited by R Tomaschek / Volume 4 Optics.../
Translated ... by L A Woodward / 1933. It belongs to the Pseudo-
series of Kind 2.
It may be named “Grimsehl (E): Text-book of physics ed by R
Tomaschek”.
4 Pseudo-Series of Kind 3. — ^A set of books mot constituting
a multi-volumed book and with the following attributes:
1 All the books are not of a common authorship;
2 The titles of the various books have a common part
capable of being used as a common generic title;
3 The title of each book has a distinctive part of its own
in addition to the generic part;
142
SERIES FH4
•
4 Each book is or can be assigned a Seihd Nunber belong-
ing to a system of simple or complex ordinal numbers; and
\ S The generic title is suitable to be used as if it were the
Name of a Series.
Example I
The volumes edited by Charles Oman under the generic title “History
of England”.
143
CHAPTER FJ
f
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1 Related Books. — A set of books whose Main Entries will
not always hie consecutively, but which all the same call for their
being linked up by the catalogue on account of their being related
to one another for some important reasons.
Five kinds of Related Books have so far been isolated. These are des-
cribed in succeeding Rules. In a sense, the books belonging to a series may
also be considered as forming a kind of Related Books. But these usually
contain in themselves all the necessary information about the Series unlike
the other kinds given in this chapter. Therefore, “Series” has been treated
in a separate chapter — Chap FH.
2 Extract. — A document which embodies a portion of another
document.
Examples-.
1 The book Library science and scientific method is an Extract from the
book Five laws of library science, cd 2, 1957.
2 The book Libraries in the District of Columbia (1921) by W I Swanton
is an extract from Special libraries. 12; 1921.
3 Separate. — A portion of a document — usually, but not
necessarily, a periodical publication — tissued in the same format
as the original, whether printed from the types or plates of the
original, or reset.
4 The word Reprint is loosely used to denote either
1 A separate; or
2 A reproduction of an edition of a work without alteration.
5 Merger Book. — A book formed by the merging of two or
more books.
Examples:
1 The book “Theory of economic dynamics, an essay on cyclical and long-
range changes in capitalistic economy” (1953) by M Kalaeck contains the
note “Published in lieu of the second ^itions of:
144
RELATED . DOCUMENTS
FJ6
^Essays in the theory of economic fluctuations’; and
’Studies in economic dynamics.”*
2 , The book “Economics and economic policy of dual societies asexempli-
fled by Indonesia” (1953) by J H Boek contains the note “Revised and en*
larged version of the author's two earlier studies published separately under
the titles:
‘Structure of the Netherlands Indian economy’ (1942); and
‘Solutions of the Netherlands Indies economy’ (1946)”.
6 Other Kinds of Related Books. —
Examples:
1 The books “Short history of the British Empire” (1934) by Anderson
and Marsdon; and “Teacher’s hand«book to Anderson and Marsdon’s
Short history of the British Empire” (1955).
2 The books “Elementary practical physics” (1938) by N H Black Davis;
and “Laboratory experiment in elementary physics: To accompany Black
and Davis’s “Elementary practical physics” (1938) by N H Black.
10
145
CHAPTER FK
EDITION
1 Edition in Sense 1.— One of the different printings or
reproductions of a document with or without slight change in
thought-content, each being distinguished form the others,
either numerically or by some other equivalent term such as
“New^\ “Revised”, and “Enlarged”.
2 Edition in Sense 2.— One of the different forms in which
one and the same work is published, each form having a distinc-
tive name almost amounting to a proper noun — such as “Arden
Edition”, “Variorum Edition”, “Memorial Edition”, and “Loeb
Classics”.
An edition in sense 2 forms Pseudo-Series of Kind 1. [See Sec FH2).
3 Each book in a series or a pseudo-series may be brought
out in seccessive Editions of Kind 1, independently of one
another.
Examples:
1 This book in the Ranganathan Series in Library Science is in edition 5,
whereas the book Colon classification in the same series is now in edition 6.
2 The Variorum Editions of the different plays of Shakespeare are now
in different editions of kind 1 . Some are in edition 1 ; some are in edition 2;
and so on.
3 The same usually happens also in respect of pseudo-series of all kinds.
Sections FKl and FK2 show that the term edition is used in two senses.
When it is used in sense 2, the application of sense 1 also becomes possible.
It will be a convenience if this homonym is resolved and different terms are
used to denote the two different senses. c
Even in respect of sense I, the term edition is not used alike by all the
publishers. Some call a mere reprint also a new edition and give it a new
number. At the other extreme some give the new number to the edition only
if there is considerable change introduced. Between these two extremes
there are all kinds of usages depending upon the degree of change introduced.
It is the continuity of the degree of changes between the editions that makes
it difficult to arrive at a definite standard for the denotation of the term
Edition.
146
CHAPTER FL
CATALOGUER’S NEEDS
1 Fonnat. — ^A statement of the size of the leaf of a document.
2 Collatim). — ^A statement of the number of volumes, pages,
plates, maps, and other illustrations, of a conventional docu-
ment, and an equivalent statement in the case of a non-con-
ventional document.
A statement of Format and Collation is essential in a catalogue of incu-
nabula and of documents of all kinds other than the conventional documents
of kinds 1 to 3. It is necessary also in a National Bibliography, State Biblio-
graphy, and other bibliographies even of modem conventional books and
periodicals. But it is not necessary in a library catalogue of modem con-
ventional books and periodicals in a Service-Library of the normal kind.
3 Imprint. — Record, in a document or a volume of it, of the
name(s) of its publisher (s), of the name (s) of the place (s) of its
publication, and of the year of its publication.
4 Edition-Statement. — Record, in a document or a volume
of it, of the number of each of the successive editions of it or of a
distinctive edition of it with a proper name, along with the year
of publication of each.
‘Edition’ and ‘Distinctive edition’ are defined in Chap FK. Page 4 of
this book gives the Edition-Statement.
5 Title-Statenient. — Record, in a document or a volume of it,
of the title of the work embodied in it.
6 Author-Statement. — Record, in a document or a volume
of it, of the name(8) of the author(s) of the work embodied in it.
Page 3 of this book contains the Title-Statement as well as the Author-
Statement of the work embodied in it.
7 Entry Statement for Author. — Record, in a document or
a volume of it, of the year of birth (and also the year of death in
the case of a deceased person), and of the alternative name(s),
147
FL7 CLASSOTED CATALOGUE CODE
if any, of each author of the work embodied in it, and in addition
an indication of the Entry Element and the Secondary Element
in ^ch name.
‘Entry element* and ‘Secondary element’ are defined in Sec FN.
It has not yet become a common practice to give the Entry Statement for
Author in documents.
71 Homonym
But cataloguers find that the years of an author are the sharp elements to
resolve homonyms in the names of authors. On account of universal literacy
and cheap methods of printing, several authors with the same name are now
producing works which are embodied into documents. It becomes difficult
to distinguish the different authors with the same name. For some years,
certain libraries have been endeavouring to ascertain the years of birth of the
authors, in order to use them for resolving homonyms. The Library of
Congress of U S A has been doing this work for all authors in the world,
whose works it gets. But the response is not always satisfactory. In 1946
1 attempted to get the years of birth of several authors whose names were not
found in Who is who. Appeal through newspapers brought little information.
Addresses of many authors could not be found out. Even when found out,
requests did not elicit replies.
72 Alternative Name
Again, cataloguers need help from Entry Statement for Author to link
up the different alternative names including pseudonyms, which an author
might have used in different works of his. If this help is not given by each of
the documents embodying the several works in respect of each of the earlier
documents, the cataloguer has to make inquiries to find them out. This
would involve waste of cataloguing time. This waste will occur in all the
hundreds of libraries acquiring documents, by the same author. Thus the
total wastage involved will be huge in any community. The magnitude of
this wastage is not easily realised. For, it is scattered into many libraries
and is thus hidden. Such a wastage is easily avoided by each document giving
the Entry Statement for Author,
73 Choice of Entry Element
Thirdly, a new phenomenon is gaining in its dimensions in our own days.
Firstly, authors are appearing in many more countries than in the past.
Secondly, books of any one country are acquired in many other countries
far more than in the past. These factors result from practically every country
coming out of its cultural exhaustion and throwing forth many creative
citizens on the one side, and the great increase in international exchange
of thought and documents on the other. When the books of other countries
come into a country, they bring with them new problems in cataloguing.
148
cataloguer''$ needs
FL75
These new problems are greatest in determining the Entry Element and the
Secondary Element in the name of an author. A modem name-of-person is,
in mc^t cases, multi-worded. Three words may be taken as the avenge in
a name-of-person. All the words do not have equal potency in individualising
the name. The cataloguer has therefore to find out the most potent word
or word-group and use the same as the Entry Element in the heading of the
entry. But different cultural groups often put the most potent elements in
a name, as it is in public usage, in different positions in the name. For
example, the Chinese put it at the beginning of a name. The British put it
at the end. In some cultural groups, the potent Element consists of two
words, or three words of which one is a conjunction. In the names in some
cultural groups, the potent word carries with it the preceding conjunction or
preposition, and the Entry Element has to include it. In some cultural groups,
a name-of-person has honorific and other removable words. Even within
a single culture such as that of India, each linguistic subgroup of a cultural
group follows different practices in this matter. It is not easy for a cataloguer
born in one cultural group to spot out such removable words in the name of
person of every other cultural group. The situation is best met by the author
of a document and its publisher indicating the Entry Element and the
Secondary Element in the name of the author, in the Entry Statement for
Author to be recorded in the document itself in a standard place.
74 Enunciation of the Problem
The third of the above problems formed the subject of an appeal in my
Theory of library catalogue (RTl 1]. The appeal read as follows :
“Library Associations throughout the world should put their heads to-
gether and arrive at an agreed set of rules for the treatment of names-of-persons.
Such an international code is very necessary now-a-days when the libraries of
almost every country have books by authors belonging to almost every one
of the others.”
It is now realised that the production of such an international code is not
practicable and simple as each book giving the necessary information on the
back of its own title page.
75 Problem Takfn to Unesco
The following calendar of events shows how the problem was taken by
me to the level of Unesco,
•
1938 Appeal made in my Theory of library catalogue,
Nov 1949 Unc.sco’s Conference in Paris on the Improvement of
Bibliographical Services.
14 Mar 1951 The following resolution was tabled by me for the Second
Conference in Delhi of the Indian National Commission
for Unesco:
“That the following items be recommended for
inclusion in the agenda for the proposed Conference
149
FL75
25 Mar 1951
13-14 May 1951
14 Sept 1951
25 Nov 1951
26 Nov to
10 Dec 1951
6 Jan 1952
Mar 1952
21-25 Apr 1952
12 May 1952
May-July 1952
31 July 1952
150
CLASSIHED CATALOGUE CODE
of National Commissions to be held at Bangkok
in 1951:
*That an Asian Committee be set up to pro<]bce an
authoritative set of rules for the rendering or Asian
Names in bibliographical entries.”
Approval of the above resolution by the Delhi Conference,
on being supported by Torres-Bodet, the Director
General of Unesco, who was present at the Conference.
Approval of the above resolutions by:
1 the First Conference of Asian Librarians held at
Indore; and
2 the Ninth All India Library Conference held at
Indore.
The document Unesco/Reg Conf 11/16 contained the
remark that the proposed Project would be in keeping
with the Unesco’s programme.
Meeting of the Head of the Libraries Division of Unesco
with a group of Indian librarians in Delhi and formula-
tion of the contents and the stages of the Project.
Passing of the following resolution by the Second Regional
Conference of Unesco National Commissions in South
Asia and South Pacific, held at Bangkok;
“(4) That consideration should be given to the pro-
posals from the Indian Library Association to
undertake the tasks outlined in document,
Unesco/Reg Conf 11/16 as follows:
(a) Establishment of a committee for framing
standard rules for the rendering of Asian
names in bibliographical and catalogue
entries.”
Circulation of my draft Working Paper on the Project to
all the probable participating countries, soliciting
opinion.
Receipt of general approval from several countries and
communication of the same to Unesco.
Approval of the Project by Unes9o’s Provisional Inter-
national Committee on Bibliography and Documenta-
tion held in Paris, and its assignment to India.
Assignment of the Project to me by the Indian Library
Association.
Field-work and Group-Meetings in the regions of the
following Languages: Marathi, Kannada, Tamil,
Malayalam, and Telugu.
Finalising the Contract on the Project.
CATALOGUER S NEEDS
FL76
August 1952
Scpl952
Dec 1952
Dec 1952
Jan 1953
Mar 1953
20-23 Apr 1953
21 May 1953
1-4 June 1953
July 1953
29 August 1953
M4Scpt 1953
22-29 Sept 1953
8 Oct 1953
11 Oct 1953
12-18 Oct 1953
31 Oct 1953
Circulation of the provisional findings of the Groups
Conferences of May to July to other linguistic regions
in India and the other participating countries. ^
Field-work and Group-Meeting in Gujarathi linguistic
region and the testing and the enlargement of the
findings.
Field-work and Group-Meeting in Bengali linguistic
region.
Discussion in Calcutta with some nationals of Pakistan^
Indonesia, Malaya, and Siam, about the structure etc,
of the names in the respective languages.
Field-work and Group-Meetings in Hindi and Punjabi
areas.
Circulation to participating countries of a pamphlet
embodying the findings arrived at up to March 1953.
Presentation of interim report to the First Session of
Unesco’s International Advisory Committee on
Bibliography, held in Paris.
Circular letter to all National and Regional Rapporteurs
and to other helpers in all participating countries,
furnishing a copy of the latest findings and asking for the
final report to be sent within three months — ^that is by
the end of August 1953.
Meetings with Muslim scholars in Hyderabad.
Receipt of hints from Siam, Indo-China, and Indonesia.
Reminders sent to all participating countries and regions.
Meetings with Muslim authors and scholars in Delhi.
Field-work and Group-Meetings in Sinhalese region in
Ceylon.
Receipt of report from Viet Nam.
Discussion of the draft rules for Indian names at a meeting
of the Expert Committee for Documentation (=EC2)
of the Indian Standards Institution.
Correspondence with Pakistan on the draft rules for
Muslim names.
Despatch of tlie final report to Unesco, Paris.
76 General Findings in the Unesco Project
Though there is demand for the above Report of mine to Unesco on the
Rendering of South Asian nameSf Unesco has not yet published that report.
One year was spent in getting opinions from France, Great Britain, and the
United States of America. The French report gave general approval. The
British report had no relevant substance in it. The American report was a
long one. It largely dealt with style and terminology. It also contained a
151
FL76
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
few useful suggestions. My remarks on the three leports were sent to Unesco
promptly from Zurich in October 1954. But nothing more has been heard of
the further action intended to be taken by Uncsco on this matter of great
importance to the library profession. ^
It is worth mentioning here that the report mentioned the following general
findings in the sections 72 and 81 of its annexure:
“72 It is impossible to make all the cultural groups of the world to conform
to a single efficient standard in Name-Formation. But it is possible to agree
upon a single efficient standard for printing the name on the title-page. This
will easily guide readers in changing over from Title-Page-Name to Entry-
Name and vice-versa.
“81 Laying down of a standard for Title-Page-Namc by all concerned
including Unesco, Iso, Ifla, Fid and the corresponding bodies in the several
countries, (along lines suggested below or in alternative ways).
1 The Entry Word or Entry Word-Group, as the case may be, should be
printed in Black Face.
2 The Honorific Words, to be omitted in the Entry Name, should not
be printed on the Title-page. If printed, they should be in Roman
Cap and lower case, preferably in different lines and in a font of smaller
size.
3 Any titular word, which should be included among the Additional
Words following the Entry Word (or Entry Word Group) should be
printed in italics.
4 Pseudonym should be separated from real name and printed in a
distinctive style in a separate block.
5 Compound Family Names and Compound Individual Names should
be hyphenated if the practice of the language does not admit of their
being written as one word or if the author habitually separates them.”
77 Indian Standard
By the end of 1954, it was possible to guess that there was some reluctance
in some quarters in Unesco either to give wide publicity to my Report or to
take any further positive action on it. This might have been partly due to
the racial discrimination which is slow to die out. 1 felt, however, that the
hard work put into it for two years should not be totally wasted. Therefore
1 took action at the national level in India, as the Chairman of the Expert
Committee for Documentation (~EC2) of the Indian SVindards Institution.
I requested that Committee to take action on the General Findings in my
Unesco Report, quoted in the preceding Section. It really went up to the
Committee as a general proposal to establish Standards for the Preliminary
Pages of a book. The most difficult of these Standards was the one relating
to the Entry Statement for Author. The Committee co-opted representatives
of the publishing and printing trades for this purpose. It struggled long
and experimented with various styles of printing the Entry Statement for
Author and with various places in the preliminary pages where it could be
152
CATALOGUER S NEEDS
FL81
printed. The final standard arrived at is elegance itself. According to it,
the Entry Statement for Author is to be printed near the top of the b^k of
the title-page in small type. Words in the name, which are removable while
rendering the name in the heading of a catalogue entry, should be omitted.
The Entry Element alone in the name should be in antique face. The other
irremovable words in the name should be printed in Roman. It costs nothing
extra to print it. This Indian Standard does not interfere with the creative
freedom of the artist in designing the title-page. The Entry Statement for
Author printed on page 4 of ed 4 of this book is in accordance with the
Indian Standard. It would have given additional lines for the alternative
names of the author, if he had any, and for joint authors and collaborators
if there were any.
78 International Standard
In the Indian Standard, all the information necessary for a cataloguer in
rendering the name of an author in catalogue entry will be readily found in
the preliminary pages of the book itself. In other words the Canon of
Ascertainability (Sec BBO) can have full sway in the matter. To make this
possible, the Indian Standard in question throws a definite responsibility on
the authors and the publishers. The information needed for the Entry
Statement for Author is best known to the author himself. The publisher
can get it from him without any difficulty when he gets the press-copy and
can print it in the book as prescribed in the Indain Standard. A stitch in
time saves nine, as the saying goes. If the publishers implement the Standard,
it will save the cataloguing time, the cataloguing man-power, and the cost
of cataloguing now involved in the search for the necessary information by
several libraries. It often happens that the source of information — the
author himself— is no longer available. In view of this, the Indian Standards
Institution entrusted me with the task of proposing the Indian Standard for
consideration and adoption by ISO/TC46— the Documentation Committee
of the International Standards Organisation. 1 did so at the Stutgart meeting
of ISO/TC46 in June 1956. All the cataloguers of the world should make
common cause to get this Standard accepted at the international level, and to
get it implemented universally by all the publishers in their respective countries.
8 Collaborator-Statement. —Record, in a document or a
volume of it, of the name (s) of collaborator (s) in respect
of the work eihbodied in it, along with an indication of
the role of each.
Whenever warranted, a modern document gives the Collaborator-Statement
in the page giving the Title-Statement and the Author-Statement.
81 Entry Statement for Collaborator. — Record, in a document
or a volume of it, of the year of birth (and also of the year of death
153
FL81 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
in the case of a deceased person), and of the alternative name(s),
if any, of each collaborator in respect of the work embodied in
it, and, in addition, an indication of the Entry Element and |^e
Secondary Element in each name.
Commentary on this Rule is similar to that on Sec FL 7.
91 Anonymous Document. — A document without Author-
Statement.
154
CHAPTER FM
CATALOGUE
1 Library Catalogue. — List of the documents in a librarry
or in a collection forming a portion of it.
For brevity we shall use in this book the term Catalogue in the sense of
“Library Catalogue.” Whenever any other kind of catalogue is meant, a
suitable epithet will be added. A catalogue may be printed; or it may be in
manuscript. It may be in cards, or in loose leaves. It may be in the form of a
continuous book, or in the paste-down form with gaps for the interpolation
of new entries in between existing entries.
2 Union Catalogue. — List of all the documents in two or more
libraries giving the names of all the libraries where copies of each
document can be found.
A Union Catalogue may cover all kinds of documents or any
restricted kind of them.
Examples:
1 Union catalogue of learned periodical publications in the libraries of South
Asia^ brought out in 1953 by S R Ranganathan.
2 Union list of serials in libraries of the United States and Canada^ cd 2,
brought out in 1943 by Winiefred Gregory.
3 List of scientific periodicals in the Bombay Presidency^ sponsored in 1 931 ,
by the Royal Institute of Science, Bombay.
3 Documentation List. — List of documents listed together for
some purpose.
The purpose is usually to bring to the notice of reader an
exhaustive or select list of documents relevant to the pursuit of
his enquiry or study.
This term is used to emphasise the inclusion of micro documents. The
fortnightly Insdoc Hsu published by the Indian National Scientific Documenta-
tion Centre, is an example. It is usual for a library to prepare special Docu-
mentation Lists on particular topics in anticipation or on demand by individual
readers or by groups of readers.
155
FM4
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
4 Bibliography^ — ^The older name for Documentation List.
Originally it was mostly a list of macro documents. Now it may inclu^
also micro documents. It is differently named according to the group of
persons to be served by them, or according to the agency which prepares
them. These are enumerated and discussed in Reference service and bibiio^
graphy [RZSUJ.
41 Micro Bibliography. — Bibliography exclusively or mostly
of Micro documents.
42 Macro Bibliography. — Bibliography exclusively of Macro
documents.
5 National Bibliography in Sense 1. — List of the books and
periodicals published in a country.
It is now becoming the practice for each nation to publish its National
Bibliography on a periodical basis. For example, the British national biblio-
graphy is being published as a weekly, with monthly, quarterly, annual, and
five-yearly cumulations or versions. The Indian national bibliography began
in 1958. In my article on the subject [RIl] in the Annals of library science^ I
have outlined a scheme for producing the Indiart national bibliography on
economic and helpful lines. An account of the British national bibliography
by A J Wells is also given in the same issue [W4].
51 National Bibliography in Sense 2. — List of books published
in a country, and books published on the country and on the
citizens of the country, and books written by any citizen of the
country, in whatever country they may be published.
6 State Bibliography. — List of the books and periodicals
published in a Constituent State of a country.
Remarks similar to those on National Bibliography are applicable to State
Bibliography.
7 Linguistic Bibliography. — List of the books and periodicals
published in a language.
Examples:
1 Deutches Bucheriiy of the Leipzig Bibliographical Institute, is planned
to cover all the books published in the German language in any country
whatever.
156
CATALOGUE FM7
2 The Cumulative book index: World list of books in the English language
of H W Wilson and Co of New York.
ljS The Abstracting Periodical defined in Sec FE22 and the Indexing
Periodical defined in Sec FE24 are also catalogues. They do not list docu-
ments in a particular library or libraries. Like the national, state, or linguistic
bibliography, they list documents which have been published.
9 This Code gives the Basic Rules needed for ail kinds of catalogues
and bibliographies of modem conventional books and periodicals.
They are by themselves sufficient to construct the Catalogue of a Service-
Library.
This Code gives also the Supplementary Rules necessary for Union
Catalogues, National Bibliographies, Abstracting Periodicals, and Indexing
Periodicals.
157
CHAPTER FN
ENTRY
I Entry. — Ultimate unit-record in a catalogue or a docu-
mentation list.
The examples given in the succeeding Rules are taken mostly from the
examples in the later parts of this book.
I I Specific Entry. — Entry mentioning a specific document.
Examples:
1 2: 55N3 N58
Ranganathan (Shiyali Ramamrita) (1892).
Classified catalogue code with additional rules for dictionary catalogue
code. Ed 4.
(Madras Library Association, publication series. 24).
{For extract see 2: 55 y (PHI) N58)
122519
2 Ranganathan (Shiyali Ramamrita) (1892).
Classified catalogue code. Ed 4. 2: 55N3 N58
3 Madras Library Association, Publication Series.
24 Ranganathan: Classified catalogue code. Ed 4. 2:55N3 N58
The above three examples of specific entry pertain to a book. It can be
seen that each of these entries mention a specific book.
12 General Entry. — Entry not mentioning any specific
document.
Examples:
1 Classihed Catalogue Code.
For books in this Class and its Subdivisions sec the Classified Part of
the catalogue under the Class Number 2:55N3
2 Classified Catalogue.
For books in this Class and its Subdivisions see the Classified Part of
the catalogue under the Class Number 2:55A5
3 Catalogue, Library Science.
For books in this Class and its Subdivisions see the Classified Part of
the catalogue under the Class Number 2:55
158
ENTRY
FN32
4 Library Science.
For books in this Class and its Subdivisions see the Classified Part of
the catalogue under the Class Number 2
5^ Bharat.
See
India.
2 Consalidated Entry. — ^Two or more entries consolidated
into a single entry.
21 Consolidated Specific Entry. — Entry mentioning two or
more specific documents.
Example:
t 2:55N3 N34, N45, N51
Ranoanathan (Shiyali Ramamrita) (1892).
Classified catalogue code. Ed 1, 2» 3.
(Madras Library Association, publication series. 4, 13, 17).
63421, 87453, 111601
22 Consolidated General Entry. — General entry replacing two
or more general entries.
Examples:
1 Library Science.
See also
Booic Selection.
Catalogue, Library Science.
Classification, Library Science.
2 Ranoanathan.
Variant Forms of the above word to be looked up. —
Ranganadan.
Rfnganathan.
Runganathan.
31 Number Entry. — Entry beginning with a Call Number
or a Class’ Number.
Examples:
The Entries given as Example 1 under Sec FN 1 1 and as Example 1 under
FN2L
32 Word Entry. — Entry beginning with a Word, or in rare
cases, with a symbol given in the author-statement of a document
as a substitute for name of author.
159
FN32
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
Examples:
The Entries given as Examples 2-3 under Sec FN1I» Examples 1-5 under
Sec FN12, and Examples 1-2 under Sec FN22.
4 Varieties of Entry
41 Main Entry. — Specific entry giving maximum information
about the whole of a document. All the other entries — ^specific
or general — relating to the document, are normally derived from
the Main Entry.
Examples:
The Entries given as Example 1 under Sec FNll and as Example 1 under
Sec FN21, and the following entry:
1 Ranoanathan (Shiyali Ramamrita) (1892).
Classified catalogue code with additional rules for dictionary catalogue
code. Ed 4.
(Madras Library Association, publication series. 24).
122519 2:55N3 N58
42 Added Entry. — Entry other than main entry.
43 Specific Added Entry. — Added entry mentioning a specific
document.
In the book-form and the multiple-card-system of catalogue, it is briefer
than the main entry.
In the unit-card-system of catalogue, it differs from the main entry only
in its top-most line, which is filled up by hand or by typing.
It does not usually draw any information from outside the main entry or
its back.
Examples:
The Entries given as Examples 2 and 3 under Sec FNl 1.
44 General Added Entry. — Added entry not mentioning any
specific document.
Examples:
Entries given as Example 1-5 under Sec FNl 2, and as Examples 1-2 under
See FN22.
45 Cross Reference Index Entry. — General added entry
160
ENiHY FN46
referring from one word or set of words to another synonymous
word or set of words.
451 Referred-To Heading. — ^The word or the word-group
with which a Cross Reference Index entry, or a See also Sulv
ject Entry in a Dictionary Catalogue ends.
The Referred-to Heading in a cross Reference Index Entry is usually the
name of a person, a geographical entity, a series, or a document, which is
preferred for use in the Main Entry.
The Referred-to Heading in a See also Subject Entry in a Dictionary
Catalogue is usually the name of a Specific Subject of a document.
452 Refenred-FVom Heading. — ^The word or the word-group
' with which a Cross Reference Index Entry or a See also Subject
Entry in a Dictionary Catalogue begins.
It is usually an alternative name of the person, the geographical entity, the
series, or the document respectively, named in the Referred-to Heading. It is
likely to be brought up by some readers while looking up the catalogue.
Examples:
Entry given as Example 2 under Sec FN22 and the following entry:
1 Salwbury,
See
Howard (Henry)
In this example, “Howard (Henry)” is the Refcrrcd-To Heading. And
“Salisbury” is the Referrcd-From Heading. This means that documents
arc entered under the name “Howard (Henry)”. But the author is also
known as “Salisbury”. This is an alternative name for him. Some reader
may look up for his books under “Salisbury”. To him, the catalogue gives the
direction that “Howard (Henry)” should be looked up.
The Referred-From Heading in a See also Subject Entry of a Dictionary
Catalogue is usually the name of a subject forming an upper link in the chain
having the Main Heading of the Referred-To Heading as the last link. It is
likely to be brought up by some readers while looking up the Catalogue {See
end of Chap KZD).*
Example:
Entry given as Example 1 under Sec FN22.
A Cross-Reference Index Entry may draw information from outside the
main entry and even from outside the document.
46 Author AnalyticaL — Specific Added Entry referring from
the name of the Author and the Title of a Contribution occur-
11
161
FN46
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
ring in a host document, to its Locus, that is, the host document
and the place of occurrence in it.
Example:
1 Webb (Sydney) (1859).
Diseases of organised society.
Forming part of
Adams: Modem state. W N35
47 Title AnalyticaL — Specific Added Entry referring from
the Title of a Contribution occurring in a host document, to
its Locus, that is, the host document and the place of occurrence
in it.
Example:
1 Diseases of organised society.
' By Webb.
Forming part of
Adams: Modern state. W N35
5 Subject Entry
51 Subject Entry. — Entry giving information about a subject.
52 Specific Subject Entry. — Subject entry which mentions
a document in which the subject is treated.
Examples:
The Entries given as Example 1 under Sec FNll, and as Example 1 under
Sec FN21, and the following:
1 Classified Catalogue Code.
Ranganathan (Shiyali Ramamrita) (1892): Classified catalogue
code. Ed 4. 2: 55N3 N58
53 Cross Reference Entry. — Specific subject entry which
mentions a portion of a document, in which the subject is treated.
It may also be called a Subject Analytical.
Examples:
1 B»vM87
See also
B;cM87 N27
Ramanujan.
Collected papers, P. xi-xix.
162
fiNTRY
FN6I
* 2 BiocatAFHY, Ramanujan (S) (1887-1919).
Ramanujan (S): Collected works* Pxi-xix. BxM87 N27
^ Class Index Entry. — ^Subject entry which refers from the
name of a class to its class number.
Exan^les:
The Entries given as Examples 1-5 under Sec FN12, and Example 1 under
SecFN22.
55 Chain Procedure. — Procedure for deriving Class Index
Entry from a class number, in a more or less mechanical way.
Chain Procedure is used to derive Class Index Entries in Classified Catalogue,
and Specific Subject Entries, Subject Analytical, and See also Subject Entries
in Dictionary Catalogue.
The Rules of Chain Procedure are given in Part K.
6 Names of Entries
61 A Specific Entry is usually named after the occupant of
its first section, which is called its Leading Section.
Serial Name of Entry
Nitmber
1 Call Number Entry
1 1 Specific Subject Entry
2 Class Number Entry
3 Author Entry
31 Joint Author Entry
4 Collaborator Entry
41 Joint Collaborator Emry
42 Commentator Entry
43 Editor Entry
44 Illustrator Entry
45 Reviser Entry
46 Translator Entry
5 Title Entry
6 Series Entry
61 Pseudo Series Entry
7 Related Book Entry
71 Extract Entry
Example: Entry given as
Example 1 under Sec FNll and
Example 1 under Sec FN21
Example I under Sec FNII and
Example 1 under Sec FN52
Example 1 under Sec FN53
Example 2 under Sec FNll and
Example 1 under Sec FN4I
Example 2 under Sec MK211
Example 5 under Sec MK211
Example 7 under Sec MK211
Example 5 under Sec MK211
Example 1 under Sec MK221
Example 6 under Sec MK221
Example 1 under Sec FN47
Example 1 under Sec MK231
Example 1 under Sec MK6
Example 1 under Sec MK4
163
FN62 CLASanED CATALOGUE CODE
62 A General Entry is usually called after its fum^on.
Exam^es:
I
Serial
Number
Name of Entry
Example: Entry given as
1
(Hass Index Entry
Examples 1-5 under Sec FN12
2
(Hoss Reference Index
Example 2 under Sec FN22 and
Entry
Example 1 under Sec FN45
3
See also Subject Entry
Example 1 under Sec FN22
63 An tintry may also be called as shown below according
to the kind of name occupying its Leading Section :
Serial
Number
Name of Entry
Example: Entry given as
1
Personal Name Entry
Example 2 under Sec FNll
2
Corporate Name Entry
3
Subject Name Entry
Example 1-4 under Sec FN12 and
1 under Sec FN22
7 Niimlier of Entries
Every book or periodical publication will get at least one entry — v/z Main
Entry. But it may also get one or more Added Entries.
While each entry is made in relation to a particular document, once it is
written out, its assignment to the appropriate part of the catalogue and its
relative position among the entries in its part are determined entirely by the
numbers and the words written in it. In other words, the document to which
it relates may be eliminated from view, while arranging the entries so as to
form a catalogue.
To put it in a different way, each entry forms one of the fundamental units
out of which the catalogue is made — one of the ultimate bricks which are
built into the structure. Just as the bricks needed for a structure are made in
several patterns, so also the entries in a catalogue are of several species and
varieties and carry different names.
The number of each species or variety of entry will vary with the document
catalogued. The relation between a document and the number of its entries
may be described as 1 to n, where n is at least 1 and may be any integer what-
ever.
71 Main Entry
There is one and only one Main Entry for each document. It enters it
164
ENTRY FN74
under its chief SpeojUc Subject. It is« as its name implies, the basic ^itty tot
the document. All the other entri^ are derived from it. It gives us more
information about the document than any other entiy. Further, as can be
seen^m Chap MH and its subdiwions, it acts as a key whichletsus know
what Added Entries the document has received in the catalogue. Qiap MA
and MB and Chap MZD are on its construction.
72 Cross Reference Entry
The number of Cross Reference Entries to be given for a document is
variable. It may be zero or one or two or three, etc, — even quite a large
number. The why of this variability will be appreciated if the purpose of the
Cross Reference Entry is understood. This question has been fully discussed,
in the light of the Laws of Library Science, in the Five laws of library science
[RF4]. A Cross Reference Entry enters a document under one or other of the
classes other than its dominant focus or class. And a document is to get as
many Cross Reference Entries as there are different subsidiary classes so dealt
with by it.
This variety of entry is necessitated by the inevitable composite nature of
most of the documents. Few are of the monograph type. Very often a
document, whose chief interest is in a certain class, may devote a chapter or
a few pages to some other topic. It may also happen that throughout a work,
primarily devoted to a particular class, information about some others is
diffusely scattered. If a catalogue lists a work only under its dominant class
and makes no attempt whatever to give analytical cross references, it will
offend the Laws of Library Science. At the same time, practical consi-
deration, such as staff, finance, and the policy of the library, may not
permit of the cross-referencing work to be done as profusely and as thoroughly
as the Laws would demand [RT5].
Thus, the nature of the document and the limitations of the library would
make the number of Cross Reference Entries of a document vary widely.
Chap MJ is devoted to the construction of this variety of entries.
73 Class Index Entry
Each document has also associated with it Index Entries which index
names of classes. These direct the reader to the region of the Classified Part
where he can find his materials enumerated and featured in a filiatory way.
Normally, every document will have at least one Class Index Entry relating
to it. Part K is devoted to the construction of this variety of entries.
74 Cross Reference Index Entry
A Cross Reference Index Entry occurs only occasionally. It is only a*
very small percentage of documents that gives rise to this variety of entries.
It is devised to economise in the number of Index Entries. It usually directs
the reader’s attention from one heading to another synonymous one in the
165
FN74 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
Alphi^betical Fart. Part L is devoted to the construction of this variety of
entries.
75 Book Index Entry r
The number of Book Index Entries for a document is also variable. Govem-
mental and similar annual and other periodical reports, of an administrative
nature, do not get any Book Index Entry. Normally every other document
will get at least one such entry. It may get more, but seldom more than
half a dozen.
These entries enable a reader to get his document, provided he has some
information or other about it. For, the Book Index Entries enter a document
under the names of authors, editors, translators, etc, under the name of
series and, in certain cases, under the title. Chap MK and other Sec in Part
N onwards are devoted to the construction of this variety of Entries.
166
CHAPTER FP
%
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE
1 Classified Catalogue.— Catalogue in which some entires are
Number Entries and some are Word Entries.
Consequently a Classified Catalogue consist of two parts— the Gassified
Part and the Alphabetical Part.
2 Classified Part.— The part of a Classified Catalogue con-
taining all its Number Entries.
21 Its entries arc arranged by their Call Numbers and Class Numbers^
as the case may be.
22 It serves as a Classified or Systematic Subject Catalogue.
23 It helps a reader to get a panoramic view of the entries of all the docu-
ments in the specific field of his interest, arranged by their specific subjects
in a helpful sequence.
3 Alphabetical Part.— The part of a Classified Catalogue
containing all its Word Entries.
31 The entries are arranged alphabetically as in a dictionary.
32 It serves as an Alphabetical Catalogue.
33 It serves also as an Alphabetical Index to Classes of Knowledge.
34 It thus forms an over-all Alphabetical Index to the Classified Part.
35 It helps a reader to get a document of which he knows the author*
or any collaborator, or the series it may belong to, or its title, or the title of
any part of it.
36 It also helps the reader to find out the Class Number of the class of
knowledge in which he is seeking a document. This Class Number will
enable him to aliglft on the particular spot in the Classified Part, where the
documents on his subject are listed. He will also find just earlier than them
the documents on subjects of which his subject is a subclass. Further, he
will also find after those in his own subject, the documents on subjects which
are subclasses of his subject.
4 Main Entry in a Classified Catalogue begins with Call Number in the
case of a book and with Class Number in the case of a periodical publication.
41 It is thus a Number Entry.
42 Therefore it belongs to the Classified Part.
167
FP3 CLASSIFIED CATALOOUE CODE
Examples:
The Eauies given as Example 1 under Sec FNil and as Example 1 under
SecFN21.
#
5 Cross Reference Entry. — Specific Added Class Number
Entry in a Classified Catalogue.
51 It refers from the Class Number of a subject to its Locus in a Host
Document.
52 It is a Number Entry.
53 Therefore, it belongs to the Classified Part of the Catalogue.
54 It corresponds to the Subject Analytical in a Dictionary Catalogue.
Example:
Entry given as Example 1 under Sec FN53.
6 Class Index Entry. — General Added Word-Entry in a
Classified Catalogue, referring from the name of a Class to its
Class Number.
61 It is derived, by Chain Procedure, from the class number of the Main
Entry or of a Cross Reference Entr>' of a document.
62 It enables a reader to know the class number of the subject on which
he seeks documents.
Examples:
Entries given as Examples 1-4 under Sec FN12.
7 Cross Reference Index Entry. — Same as Sec FN45.
It enables a reader to find out the call number of the document, for which
he looks up the catalogue under the name of its author, collaborator, title,
scries, or any related book.
Examples:
Entries given as Examples 2 and 3 under Sec FNl 1, and Example 1 under
Sec FN46 and Sec FN47 respectively.
8 Book Index Entry. — Specific Added Wprd Entry in a
Classified Catalogue.
91 In a Classified Catalogue, Main Entry, Cross Reference Entry, and
Oass Index Entry are Subject Entries.
92 In a Classified Catalogue, Main Entry is a Specific Subject Entry.
93 In a Classified Catalogue, Cross Reference Entry is a Subject-Analytical.
94 In a Classified Catalogue, Class Index Entry is a General Subject Entry:
168
CHAPTER FQ
SECTIONS OF ENTRY
0 Section of an Entry. — ^That which is prescribed to be a
separate paragraph in an entry in a Card Catalogue.
01 When an entry occurs in a catalogue in book-form, all its sections may
occur as separate sentences of a single paragraph.
1 Leading Section. — Section 1 of an Entry.
2 Heading Section. —
1 Leading Section of a Word Entry.
2 Section 2 of a Call Number Entry of a book or of a
Class Number Entry of a periodical publication, i e of a Main
Entry in a Qassified Catalogue
3 Section 3 of a See also Subject Entry.
4 Section 3 of a Cross Reference Index Entry.
3 Title Section.— Section of a Main Entry, giving the title
of the document catalogued, along with the names of Colla-
borators and of Edition if any.
31 BibUognipliical Section. — Section giving format, collation,
and imprint, in the Main Entry of a Macro Document.
32 Locos Section. —
1 Section in the Main Entry giving the locus of a Micro
Document, in its host document.
2 Section in a Cross Reference Entry of a Classified
Catalogue, giving the locus.
3 Section in a Subject Analytical in a Dictionary Cata-
logue, giving the locus.
4 Note Section.— Section of a Main Entry giving the name of
series and/or the name(s) of related book(s) and certain other
information in the case of a Periodical Publication.
41 Annotation Section. — Section in a Main Entry giving an
Annotation, or a Synopsis, or an Abstract of the document
catalogued.
169
FQ5 CLASSmED CATALOGUE CODE
5 Acceaden Noniber Section. — ^Last section in the front of a
Main Entry Card, giving the Accession Number of the Document.
6 IVacing Section. — Back of a Main Entry Card, indicating
all the Added Entries of the document.
61 Tracing Section is not normally given in a catalogue in book-form.
91 Directing Section. — Section in an Added Entry directing
attention to a Document, or a Class Number, or Name of a Class,
or an Alternative name.
This section occurs in a Cross Reference Entry, a Class Index Entry, a See
also Subject Entry, and a Cross Reference Index Entry.
92 Second Section. — Section in a Book Index Entry giving
the specification of the concerned document{s).
93 Index Number Section. —
1 Section in a Book Index Entry, giving the Call Number
of the document.
2 Section in a Class Index Entry, giving the Class Number
of the class.
3 Section in a Specific Subject Entry, giving the Call
Number of the document.
4 Section in a Subject Analytical, giving the Call Number
of the document.
5 Section in the Main Entry of a Dictionary Catalogue
giving the Call Number in general and Class Number in the case
of the Periodical Publication.
170
CHAPTER FR
HEADING
0 Heading. — ^The occupant of a Heading Section {See Sec
FQ2).
01 A Heading may be the name of
1 A person;
2 A geographical entity;
3 A corporate body;
4 A series;
5 A document;
6 A subject; or
7 A language.
02 A person or coiporate body whose name is used as Heading may be
1 An author;
2 A joint author;
3 A collaborator;
4 A joint collaborator; or
5 The subject of a document.
03 The name of a geographical entity, used as Heading, may represent
the name of
1 A Government;
2 A Document ; or
3 A Subject.
1 Homonym in Sense 1. — One and the same name denoting
two or more entities of any one of the categories, such as
1 Person; 5 Series;
2 Geographical Entity; 6 Subject;
3 Corporate Body; 7 Language.
4 Document;
11 Homonymous Heading in Sense 1. — ^A heading which is a
Homonym in Sense 1,
12 Individualising Element in Some 1. — Term(s) added to a
name in a Heading to resolve Homonym in Sense 1 — that is, so as
to individualise the entity intended to be denoted.
171
FR12 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
JExamples:
1 Hall (James) (17S5).
Hall (James) (1761).
These are both names-of-persons. The elements in brackets are Infiivi-
dualising Elements in Sense 1 .
2 Tanjore.
Tank>re (City).
Taniore (Taluk).
These three are geographical names. The words in brackets are Individuali*
sing Elements in Sense 1 . The first of the above headings is the name of the
geographical area of the largest extent denoted by the homonym being
considered. It is a district of which the taluk is only a part.
3 Godavari.
Godavari (City).
Godavari (River).
Godavari (Taluk).
These four are geographical names. The words in brackets are Individualism
ing Elements in Sense 1.
4 Ramayana (Kamban).
Ramayana (Tulasidas).
Ramayana (Valmiki).
These three are names of books. The words in brackets are Individualising
Elements in Sense 1.
5 Cambridge.
Cambridge (Borough).
Cambridge (Maryland).
Cambridge (Massachusetts).
Cambridge (Ohio).
2 Homonym in Sense 2. — One and the same name denoting
entities of any two or more of the categories mentioned in
Sec FRI.
21 Homonymous Heading in Sense 2. — A Heading which is a
Homonym in Sense 2.
22 Individualising Element in Sense 2. — ^Term(s) added to a
name in a Heading to resolve a Homonym in Sense 2 — that is, so
as to individualise the entity intended to be denoted.
Examples:
1 Salisbury.
Salisbury (Book).
Salisbury (City).
Salisbury (Subject),
172
HEAPING FR42
Hie words in bradkets ace Individualising Bksments in Sense 2. The fim
of tito above headings is the name of a person.
3^ Homonym in Sense 3. — Homonym simultaneously in
Senses 1 and 2.
31 Homonymous Heading in Sense 3« — A Heading which is a
Homonym in Sense 3.
32 Individualising Elem^t in Sense 3. — ^A succession of Indi-
vidualising Elements in Senses 1 and 2 added to a name in a
Heading to resolve Homonym in Sense 3 — that is, so as to
individualise the entity intended to be denoted.
Example:
Cambridge (Massachusetts) (Book).
Here, ‘‘Massachusetts” is Individualising Element in Sense 1 and “Book”
is Individualising Element in Sense 2. Both taken together form Individualis-
ing Element in Sense 3.
4 Individualised Heading. — Heading including Individualising
Element(s) added to resolve homonym.
41 Word-Group in a Heading. — One or more words, constitu-
ting the name forming the heading, which are inseparable and
should be taken together, to make the specification of the entity
intelligible.
Examples:
1 “Hall” in Example 1 under Sec FR12 is a Word-Group of one
word only.
2 De Quincy, Le Sage, Ni Ni, Quiller-Couch, Rajendra Prasad,
SivASWAMi Ayyar, Yusuf Au;
Chin Hills, Costa Rica, La Plata, Madhya Pradesh, New Delhi,
New York, Nova Scotcia, Porto Rico, West Lothian;
Book selection, Elementary education, Integral calculus. Respi-
ratory system;
are Word-Groups of two words,
3 Basu Ray Chaudhuri, Leon y Roman, Martin du Card, Muham-
mad Ibn Aly, Sankara Narayana Pillai;
Clacton-on-Sea, Dera Ghazi Khan, Prince Edward Islands, New
South Wales, Rio de Janeiro;
arc Word-Groups of three words.
42 Individualised Word-Group in a Heading. — Word-
173
FR42 CXASSIHED CATALOGUE CODE
Group in a heading taken along with the Individualising Elements
if any.
Example:
“Hall (James) (1755)” in Example 1 and “Tanjore (City)” in Example 2
under Sec FR12 are examples of Individualised Word-Groups in a Heading.
43 Block in a Heading. — Individualised Word-Group in a
Heading.
This term is introduced for brevity.
5 Heading of an entry may be Simple or Multiple.
51 Simple Heading. — Heading consisting of a single Block.
Examples:
1 Hall (James) (1755).
2 Tanjore (City).
3 Cambridge (Massachusetts ) (Book).
52 Multiple Heading. — Heading consisting of two or more
Blocks, usually separated by a punctuation mark such as a
comma.
Examples:
See under Sec FR56 and FR57.
53 First Heading or Main Heading. — The First Block in a
Multiple Heading.
Examples:
The following remarks pertain to the successive examples given in Sec FR56;
1. “India” is First Heading or Main Heading in Example I.
2 “Law” is First Heading or Main Heading in E\^mplc 2.
3 “Diagnosis” is First Heading or Main Heading in Example 3.
The following remarks pertain to the successive examples given in
Sec FR57;
1 “Madras” is First Heading or Main Heading in Example 1.
2 “Madras (City)” is First Heading or Main Heading in Example 2.
3 “Madras” is First Heading or Main Heading in Example 3.
4 “Western railway (India)” is First Heading or Main Heading
in Example 4.
174
HEADING FR57
5 “University College (London)” is First Heading or Main Heading
in Example 5.
S4* Second Heading or First Subheading. — ^The Second Block
in a Multiple Heading.
Examples:
The following remarks pertain to the successive examples given in SecFR56:
1 “Law” is Second Heading or First Subheading in Example I .
2 “Constitution” is Second Heading or First Subheading in Example 2.
3 “Tuberculosis” is Second Heading or First Subheading in Example 3.
The following remarks pertain to the successive examples given in Sec FR57 :
1 “Council of Ministers” is Second Heading or First Subheading in
Example 1.
2 “Council” is Second Heading or First Subheading in Example 2.
3 “District Court (Coimbatore)” is Second Heading or First Sub-
heading in Example 3.
4 “Audit (Department of-—)” is Second Heading or First Subheading
in Example 4.
5 “Biometric (Laboratory)” is Second Heading or First Subhead-
ing in Example 5.
56 Multiple Subject Heading. — Subject Heading having, in its
successive blocks, the names of successive classes.
These are normally of increasing extension.
Examples:
1 India, Law, Library.
2 Law, Constitution, Great Britain.
3 Diagnosis, Tuberculosis, Lungs.
561 It can be seen that normally any class mentioned in a subheading in a
Multiple Subject Heading will have the earlier classes mentioned in the head-
ing as its subclasses.
562 The Main l^cading and the Subheadings of a Multiple Subject
Heading are derived from a Class Number by the Chain Procedure described
in Part K.
57 Multiple Corporate Heading. — Corporate Heading having,
in its successive blocks, the name of a Corporate body and the
names of its successive organs of increasing remove.
175
FR57 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
Exatnples:
1 Madras, Council of Ministers.
2 Madras, (City), Council, Works (Standing Committee for—).
3 Madras, District Court (Coimbatore).
4 Western Railway (India), Audit (Department of—).
5 University College (London), Biometric (—Laboratory).
6 Descriptive Element. — ^Term(s) added after the name of a
person or a corporate body including its individualising element(5),
if any, to denote the role of the person or the corporate body,
if it is other than that of author — such as, J Auth; Ed; J Ed; Tr;
J Tr; Assis; Dir; Ded; etc.
7 Connecting Element. — Word like “and'’, “of’*, etc occurring
within a Block in a Heading or between the names of J Authors,
or J Collaborators.
Examples:
1 “y’ * in “Leon y Roman.”
2 “on” in “Clacton-on-Sea.”
3 “de” in “Rio de Janeiro.”
4 “and” in “Ranganathan (Shiyali Ramamritha) (1892) and
Sivaraman (Kesarimangalam Manikam Aiyar) (1903).”
5 “and” in “Library Association (Great Britain) and American
Library Association,”
8 Entry Element. — ^The Word or Word-Group occurring
First in a Block in a Heading, that is before any Individualising
or Descriptive or any other Element belonging to the Block.
81 Entry Word. — The First Word in an Entry Element,
176
CHAPTER FZD
« •
DICTIONARY CATALOGUE
1 Dictionary Catalogue. — Catalogue in which all the entries
are Word Entries.
11 Consequently, a Dictionary Catalogue consists of one part only.
2 The entries in a Dictionary Catalogue are arranged alphabetically as in
a dictionary.
3 In a Dictionary Catalogue, the Main Entry begins with the Name of
the Author or a substitute for it.
Example;
Entry given as Example 1 under Sec FN41.
4 Subject Index Entry in a Dictionary Catalogue;
1 Specific Subject Entry;
2 Subject Analytical ;
3 See also Subject Entry.
41 Specific Subject Entry. — Specific Added Word Entry in a
Dictionary Catalogue, entering a document under the name of the
class treated in, if it is unifocal, or under that one of its classes,
which is most dominant, if it is multifocal.
Example:
Entry given as Example 1 under Sec FN52.
42 Subject Analytical. — Specific Word Entry in a Dictionary
Catalogue entering a document under the name of a class treated
in it in a subsidiary way, that is occurring as a secondary focus
in the documer|j.
Example:
Entry given as Example 2 under Sec FN53.
43 See also Subject Entry. — General Added Word Entry in a
Dictionary Catalogue referring from the name of one Subject to
that of another.
12
177
FZD44
CLASSIHED CATALOGUE CODE
44 All the Subject Index Entries are derived from the Class
Number of the document or of any portion of it for which a
Specific Subject Entry has been made.
Examine'.
Entry given as Example 1 under Sec FN22.
7 Cross Reference Index Entry — Same as Sec FN45.
8 Book Index Entry. — A Specific Added Word Entry in a
Dictionary Catalogue.
Example:
Entry given as Example 2 under Sec FN53.
178
PART G
CONFLICT OF AUTHORSHIP
CHAPTER GA
INTRODUCTION
1 Difficulties
Difficulties arise in deciding the author of a Work. These difficulties may
be taken to centre round the following issues:
1 Person vs Person
2 Person vs Corporate Body
3 Government vs Institution
4 Ecclesiastical Polity
5 Institution vs Institution
6 Delegation-from-Body vs Delegated-to-Body
7 Legal Publications
8 Author’s Name Merged in Title
2 Problem for International Catalogue Code
It is desirable from the point of view of international intercourse in the
Library field such as. International Library Loan and Centralized Cataloguing,
that a uniform practice should be followed in respect of the problems men-
tioned in Sec GAL Unesco took interest in this problem. It requested
the International Federation of Library Associations to pursue the problem,
promising as usual the necessary financial help. Accordingly at its meeting
held in Zagreb in September 1954, the international Federation of Library
Associations seized this problem. After several years of work, the problem
was brought for consideration at the International Conference on Cataloguing
held in Paris from 9 to 18 October 1961. The attention of the International
Conference was invited to these problems in a paper circulated to the authori-
ties of the Conference early in 1961 [RI3].
3 Evasion of the Problems
However, the Conference did not consider the problems on the basis of
accepted Canons and Principles of Cataloguing. In fact, the work of the
Conference was not at all guided by such canons and principles. The
Conference dealt in detail with certain problems that are best left to National
and Linguistic C^des. But this question of Conflict of Authorship was not
adequately discussed by the Conference [R14].
181
CHAPTER GB
PERSON VS PERSON
1 Spoken Word
In certain types of works, the thought expressed in the spoken word is not
committed to writing by the author of the spoken word. The words are not
even published always exactly in the form in which they were spoken. Usually
they are edited, rearranged, and featured. (The person, who creates the
thought, is taken as the author; while the person who collects or notes down
the words uttered by the creator of the thought and gives them the shape of a
work is regarded as a collaborator. He may be called Reporter. The
reporter may even prompt the author by his owm questions and suggestions;
and yet he is not given the status of a joint author. It must be stated that
the steno-typist of an author is not even regarded as a collaborator.
Ser N Type of Work
Author
1
Ana, table-talk
Talker
2
Dialogue, conversation.
Participants
debate
3
Interview
Person(s) interviewed
4
Lecture
Lecturer
5
Narration (real and not
Narrator
fictitious)
6
Mediumistic communication
Medium(s) and not the
disembodied souls
Example:
Consider the book whose title page reads as follows:
Plasma Physics: A Course Given by S Chandrasekhar at the University
of Chicago. Notes compiled by S K Trehan. *
The Author of the book is S Chandrasekhar. Trehan is only the
Reporter— that is, a Collaborator.
2 Correspondence
In the case of correspondence, the correspondent(s) should be
taken as joint author(s). If, however, the document contains the
182
PERSON VS PERSON GB6
correspondence of one person only with several others — (hen the
one person alone may be taken as the author.
3 Map and Atlas
The cartographer should be taken as the author of a map or
atlas.
4 Dependent Work
Dependent Work is a work got by some modiScation of another work or
by the augmentation of it. The modification or augmentation, as the case
may be, need not necessarily be by the author of the original work. It may
be done by some other person or corporate body. Conflict in authorship
arises in respect of the original author and the modifier or the augmenter.
The decision in such cases is to be in accordance with Sec CBS and
GB6.
5 Author of the Original
The author of the Original should be taken as the Author of the
following kinds of dependent works:
1 Abridgement 4 Revision
2 Adaptation 5 Selection
3 Paraphrase 6 Translation
6 Author of Dependrat Work
The author of the Dependent work should be taken as the
Author of the following kinds of dependent works:
1 Commentary 91
(Of greater importance 92
than the basic work) 93
2 Concordance 94
3 Contiijuation 95
4 Dramatisation 96
3 Imitation
6 Index
7 Libretto
8 Music-setting
Novelisation
Parody
Sequel
Supplement
Versification
Version in the same or
another language, which
has sufficient new qualities
in thought and/or expres-
sion to deem it an inde-
pendent work on its own
right.
183
CHAPTER GC
PERSON KS CORPORATE BODY
0 Introduction
The title-page of a document may indicate corporate authorship or may
contain the name of a corporate body, in addition to containing the name($)
of person(s). Such a document raises a conflict in authorship. This conflict
can be resolved in most cases by observing the rules given in this chapter.
1 If the title-page mentions the name(s) of person(s) only in
the author-statement and does not mention or indicate the name
of any corporate body(ies) other than the one(s) belonging to the
publishing trade mentioned in the imprint, the work in the
document is of personal authorship.
2 If the title-page does not mention the name(s) of person(s)
in the author-statement, but mentions or indicates somewhere in
itself or in the overflow of title-page the name of a corporate
body(ies) other than a body belonging to the publishing trade
mentioned in the imprint, and if there is also internal evidence of
corporate authorship, the work in the document is of corporate
authorship; provided that, even in the case of the name(s) of the
corporate body(ies) mentioned in the imprint being only that of a
body belonging to the publishing trade, if it is a work by the
corporate body itself— such as its catalogue, administration
report, history— the work in the document is of corporate
authorship.
3 If the title-page mentions or indicates the name(s) of a
corporate body(ies) other than a body belonging to the publishing
trade mentioned in the imprint, and also the name^s) of person(s)
in the place usually giving the name of the author. —
31 The work in the document is of corporate authorship, if it
is of a deliberative, legislative, directive, judicial, administrative
or routine character limited by the purpose or function or outlook
of the corporate body. The mere fact that a document is
published, financed, aided, approved, sponsored, or authorised
by a corporate body is not suflBcient reason to deem the work in
184
PERSON VS CORPORATE BODY GC5
it to be of corporate authorship, an4 not to be of personal
authorship.
32« The work in the document is of personal authorship, if its
primary function is the extension of the boundary of a field of
knowledge or its intensification, and the responsibility for the
thought and expression of it rests on the person and not on the
office held by him in the corporate body, in spite of his being a
paid or an honorary employee or a member of the corporate body.
The mere mention of the personal name of an official of the
corporate body in the place in which author’s name is usually
mentioned in a book, is not sufficient reason to deem the work in
it to be of personal authorship and not to be of corporate
authorship.
4 Legal Publication
Legal publications raise certain issues of their own in regard to author-
ship. For example, a bill is usually the work of a Ministry. Its modification
may be the work of a Select Committee. The Act, before the assent of the
Head of the State, is the work of the Legislature. These cases give
no difficulty. But the final Act is the work of the Legislature and the
Head of the State. Constitutionally, the part of each of these limbs of the
government is of equal weight. Quantitatively, they are quite unequal.
Further, the details have to be filled up usually by the Executive or even by a
Department. For these reasons, we may have the following Rule:
41 The whole government should be taken as the author of an
Act and a collection of Acts, with or without the Rules framed
under them.
Another difficulty may arise in respect of legal publications. Editions of
an Act may be brought out by a private author with notes, commentaries,
and case laws in various degrees of proportion. Such publications arc
perhaps best treated according to Sec GB82.
42 An edition of an Act, brought out by a private author with
introduction, notes, commentaries, case laws, and over-all
observations, should be treated as provided in Sec GB6.
5 Person vs Conference. — A Conference is deemed author
only of its agenda, minutes, resolutions, report of proceedings,
and similar collectively created thought. But a collection of
185
GC5
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
learned papers or memoranda presented by person(s) or corporate
body(ies) at the conference is deemed to have Ae respective
person(s) or body(ies) as author(s).
186
CHAPTER GD
%
CORPORATE BODY VS CORPORATE BODY
1 GOVERNMENT VS INSTITUTION
Several institutions are government-owned or nearly so. Some of these
are autonomous. Some are managed directly by government as if they
were departments or other organs. There are all possible grades of transition
from an unmistakable organ of government to an independent institution.
Now and again, there is also shift of the same institution in course of time
from the status of an independent institution to any status short of an un-
mistakable organ and vice versa. A useful test is this :
Organ of first remove is usually mentioned in a modern written constitu-
tion. On the analogy of this, organ of first remove of a nation with un-
written constitution may be recognised.
Another fact has to be remembered. There is a tendency for the state to
take up more and more functions, beyond the traditional and primary ones
of government — v/z, policy decision, legislation, defence, judiciary, and
administration. It takes up many service functions such as:
1 Construction and maintenance of hi^-ways, bridges, harbours, air-
ports and such other essentials of transport;
2 Astronomical and meteorological observations through its own
observatories;
3 Transport systems such as railways, tramways, bus system, and
airways;
4 Communication systems such as postal, telegraph, telephone, wireless
and radio services;
5 Healing the sick and wounded through its own hospitals and its own
sanatoria;
6 Teaching through its own schools, colleges, and universities; and
7 Banking service through its own banks.
Perhaps none of the above seven categories except the first is usuaUy
included among the primary functions of a government. At any rate, this
may be adopted as a cataloguing convention.
But for such a convention, most institutions will come into the category
of organs of government, as the state progresses towards socialisation. In
a truly totalitarian state, there may not be any corporate body other than the
government and its organs. To break up this octopus-type of governmental
authorship, cataloguing practice has to adopt a convention to distinguish
between an organ of a government and an institution. The conventions
may be put in the form of Sec GD2 and GD3.
187
GD2
CLASaO^ CATALOGUE CODE
2 GoTeniiiMiit as Aathttf
For a work bearing on the discharge of primary functioi^ —
administration report, report of deliberation, direction, and any
kindred work embodying thought created and expressed by an
organ of government of first remove, second remove, etc as
defined in Sec FC21 to FC217 — the government or its appro-
priate organ(s), as the case may be, should be taken as its author.
3 Institution as Anthor
Any autonomous or even non-autonomous organisation,
engaged in the work of research, production, commerce and
supply of commodities and services to the public, may have to be
taken to be the institutional author for an work for whose thought
and expression it is responsible. It is so even if the institution is
owned and managed by the government.
4 Elusive Cases
The above-mentioned criterion to distinguish between governmental
and institutional authorship will be sufficient in most cases. But there will
occasionally be refractory cases baffling this criterion. No help except
the persona] judgment of the cataloguer will be of avail in such cases. By a
periodical review of such elusive cases, the criterion can be made progressively
sharper.
5 Ecclesiastical Polity
Ecclesiastical polity has features similar to those of a government. There
are organs of different removes from the central authority. There are also
autonomous institutions. The criterion to resolve conflict of authorship
between an ecclesiastical organ and institution is similar to that for the
conflict between a governmental organ and institution, astgiven in Sec GDI
and GD3.
6 Institution vs Institution
The criterion to resolve the conflict about authorship between a parent
institution or one of its organs on the one side, and an autonomous afflJiated
institution on the other is similar to that for the conflict between a govern-
mental organ and institution as given in Sec GD2 and GD3.
188
OORFORAIC BODY VS OORTOItAlS WDY GD81
7 OdcsrtiQii— Conflict nbont Pnnnt Bodico
Dd^atkm to a conference or an international body sudi as the Umted
Nalfpns appears to be amphibious. A delegation is itself a corporate body.
It implies the existence of two other corporate bodies — ^Del^ated-fhnn-Body
and Ddegated-to-Body. The kind of document, about whose authnship
conflict arises, may comprise memoranda submitted, resolutions tabled, and
utterances made, by the delegation at the conference, and report by the
Delegation to the Delegated-from-Body. There is no doubt about the author*
ship belonging to the Delegation. But the Delegation is not an independent
body. It is only an organ. The name of the body of which it is an organ
should be mentioned along with its own name to establish its identity. The
question is, “Is it an organ of the Delegated-from>Body or of the Delegated*
to-Body ?” The answer to this question depends upon the answer to another
question: “Which body takes the ultimate responsibility for the thought*
content of the document created by the delegation? Is it the Delegated*
from-Body or the Delegated-to*Body ?“ There can be no difference of opinion
about the answers to these questions. The answers lead to the following Rule:
71 The Delegated-from*Body should be taken to be the parent
body of a Delegation to a Conference or to a body such as the
United Nations or a Peace Conference in respect of any work
embodying any thought and expression created by the Delegation.
8 Synopshi of Cataloguing Conventions
The following is a synopsis of the cataloguing conventions more or less
stabilised at present, in deciding the corporate body to be deemed the author
of a work— parent body or an organ of it on the one side and a dependent
of afiitiated institution on the other.
Group 1
81 Each of the following Institutions should be taken as
Author of its works, as if it were independent of the parent body,
if any exists, be it government or institution: —
Abbey
Bank
Board of Trade
Cathedral
Cemetery
Chamber of
Commerce
Church (place of
worship)
College
Convent
Endowment
Exchange (Money)
Firm of Enterprise
Foundation
Guild
Masonic Body
Monastery
Mosque
Mutt
Park
189
GD81
, CXASSmED «ATAU>GUE CODE
Political Party School Telephonollxc^lige
Pc^ Office Stock Exchange T^ple
Produce Exchange
Religious Order Telegraph Office University
Group 2
82 Each of the following Institutions should be taken as
Author of its works as if it were independent of the parent body,
if any exists, be it government or institution, provided it has a
distinctive name: —
Botanical
Garden
Chapel
Exhibition
Experimental
Station
Festival
Hospital
Laboratory
Library
Museum
Observatory
Shop
Zoological
Garden
If any of the above institutions has no distinctive nanm, it should
be treated as an organ of its parent body.
Group 3
83 Any formal or informal group of the members of a parent
body formed for recreative, ameliorative or any other economical
or social purposes should be treated as an organ of the parent body
even if it has a distinctive name.
Group 4
84 Each Section or Branch of an institution s\iould be taken
as Author of its work, as if it were independent of its parent body,
provided it has a distinctive name not involving the name of thp
parent body.
If a section or a branch has no distinctive name not involving
the name of the parent body, it should be treated as an organ of the
parent body.
190
. CORK^ATC BOOY VS CORKHU’P B|l?6x' G0915
Group 5
85 Each Intonatioiial lostitotion or Copfemce— isolated or
contidvdng, — of private persons, non-govemmental institution^,
or national govemments'should be taken as Andior of work made
up of its deliberations.
91 Refractory Cases
The preceding Rules of this Chapter will prove sufficient to resolve the
conflict that may arise in respect of authorship in most of the cases. The
commentaries in Sec GD4 and GD7 and their subsections amount to some
loud’thinking in resolving the conflict in some of the difficult cases in the
light of the definition of authorship and the Sec given in this Chap. All the
same, it cannot be asserted that every possible refractory case involving con-
flict in authorship can be solved unambiguously. New guiding principles
will have to be evolved as and when new types of refractory cases arise. A few
more discussions and directions are given here. These are chosen to counter-
act a wrong tradition brought into vogue by the Anglo-American Code.
91 1 Charter
The author of the charter granted by a government to a city or a rural
district or any other body is the government and not the recipient of the
charter. For, the charter is a document, for the thought-content and the
expression of which the government is responsible.
The prescription in Rule 87 of the Anglo-American Code implies a violation
of this fact, if it is to be taken as a rule for author-entry.
912 Law of Territory
The author of a law of a territory promulgated by a suzeraine power is
the government of the suzeraine power and not that of the territory. For
the law in question is a document, for the thought-content and expression
of which the government of the suzeraine power is responsible.
The prescription in Rule 84B of the Anglo-American Code implies a
violation of this fact, if it is to be taken as a rule for author-entry.
9^3 Constitution of Dependency
The remarks are similar to those for Law of Territory.
914 Decision or a Court of Law
A Court of Law is the author of any of its decisions ora collection of them.
915 Report of Legal Proceedings
A report of the legal proceedings in a Court of Law raises some conflict in
191
GD91S CLASSmED catalogue coot
regard to its authorship* A full report of the case will contain an account
of the plaint and the defence statements of all the parties concerned. It may
also contain a verbatim report of the chief-examination and the cross-examina-
tion of the parties and the witnesses. It may further contain the arguments
of the advocates of all the parties. It must necessarily contain the verdict
of the jury, if any, and the judgment of the court. Even if the report is brief,
it will contain a summaiy of all these elements. The different elements have
different authors. And yet, the contribution of each is not conveniently
separable from those of the others. At the same time, the report cannot be
regarded to be of joint-authorship, as the portion for which each author is
responsible is specified. Perhaps, it resembles a document embodying corres-
pondence between several persons. There, however, the thought-content of
the document gets developed jointly by all the correspondents. ^Such a
description cannot apply with sufficient propriety to the report of legal
proceedings of a case in a court. Can we take the following view ? It is
the court which co-ordinates and guides the course of the proceedings, and
finally summarises the entire proceedings and gives the judgment. The real
focus or the culmination of the report is the part played by the court from
the beginning right up to the judgment. Therefore, the court may be taken
as the author of the report of the legal proceedings of a case tried by it.
192
CHAPTER GE
*
NAME OF ORIGINAL AUTHOR MERGED IN
TITLE
1 lotroduction
Some works are almost immortal. They have elements of
permanent value. They are saturated with the personality of the
author, which itself is very powerful and highly organized. It is
usually a seminal book cutting new ground, blazing new trail,
stimulating new thought, and so on. It gets printed repeatedly
even after centuries. It stimulates other works on itself. Sudi a
work is called a classic {See Sec FAT). Since a classic outlives
the author, the title page of any later edition of it has often
necessarily to contain the name of a collaborator as editor or as
translator or in any other capacity. The author’s name may be
merged in the title of the work. It may even happen that the name
of the original author is totally absent from the title page. The
conflict of authorship in the case of classics is dealt with else-
where {See Chap GB).
1 1 Long-Lived Work
We are only concerned here with other fairly long-lived works.
The essential value of such a long-lived work does not centre
round its seminal nature or on the personality of the author or on
the elements of permanent value contained in it so much as in
classics. On the other hand, it embodies current knowledge or
current informatjpn. For this reason it has to be revised and
brought up to date from time to time. In other words, its
current validity essentially requires correction or omission of old
matter and addition of new matter from time to time. But the
frame work of the original edition is retained in all the successive
editions. Such a work often occurs in all the sciences— parti-
cularly in the taxonomic works of natural sciences, medical works,
and legal works.
13
193
GE12
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
12 Extent of Change
At one extr^e, the change in a new embodiment of a long-|ived
work may be slight — ^that is, it may affect only a small fraction of
the work. At the other extreme, it may affect most of the work —
at any rate, more than half the work. The change-over from the
one extreme to the other may be in gradual steps from embodi-
ment to embodiment.
13 Need for Collaborator
From certain edition onwards, a long-lived work of the nature
described above will necessarily require a collaborator. It may be
due either to the incapacity of the original author or to his having
been dead. Surely thereafter, the original author can have no
responsibility for the changes made in the later editions. The
entire responsibility for bringing the work up to date falls on the
collaborator alone. This factor has resulted in the title page of
the later editions reflecting the change of responsibility in diverse
ways.
2 Examples
Example 11;
Dewey/Oecimal Classification/and Relative index/ Devised by/Melvil
Dewey/16 EditionlW ohxme I /Tables/Forest Press Inc/Lake Placid Club/Essex
Country/New York.
First published anonymously in 1876 under the title; A Classification
and Subject Index. Ed 2 to 14 published under the title: Decimal Classi-
fication and Relative Index.
In P 19, the Editor’s Introduction says, *‘The editors have tried to provide
enough subdivisions but not too many. . . In this respect the 16th edition
varies distinctly from earlier editions . . . Edition 14 has 31,364 separate
entries in the Tables . . . While edition 16 has 17,929,
“There are in this edition 1,603 relocations. Of these 832 are total, mean-
ing that the entire number has been ^dropped’.” ‘
On P 27 the Editor's Introduction is signed “Benjamin A Kuster/Editor.*'
Thus, there is no doubt that there is a considerable alteration in ed 16. About
10 per cent of the classes have been relocated. The number of classes has
been nearly halved. This has certainly involved a good deal of judgment.
Surely no responsibility for this can go to the original author Melvil Dewey
who died two decades earlier. The responsibility can only rest with the
editor Kuster. But Kuster has not allowed his name to be printed even in
the Collaborator Statement in the title-page.
194
author’s name merged . GE2
The only hint that somebody other than the original author has played a
a large part in Ed 16 is to be found in the Author-Statement. In that state-
m^t we find '^Devised by Melvil Dewey.*’
Ailbther peculiarity is that there is no mention either in the Foreword or
in the Editor’s Introduction of the policy decision to merge the original
author’s name in the title, though it is found to be merged in the title-page.
Example 14:
Rider’s/Intemational/Ciassification/for the arrangement of books/on the
shelves of general libraries/By Fremont Rider/Librarian Emeritus, Olin
Memorial Library,/Wesleyan University/Preliminary Edition/Printed as
manuscript for the receipt of corrections, amendations and amplifications./The
Author/Middletown, Conn./1961.
This example is of a different kind. The author’s name is merged in the
title by the author himself, in addition to his name appearing in the ’Author-
Statement’ in the title-page.
Example 221:
James Duff Brown’s/Manual/of/Library Economy/ Seventh Edition/
Completely rewritten/By/R Northwood Lock F L A/Grafton & Co/London/
1961.
Unlike in example 231 the title-page indicates Lock’s role as a reviser of
Brown’s work.
Example 222:
Thomson’s Outlines/of/Zoology/Revised by/ James Ritchie, M.A., D.Sc.
Ninth 'Edition/Geoffrey Cumbcrlege/Oxford University Press/London New
York Toronto.
Extract:
“The present edition, the first to appear since the death of Sir J Arthur
Thomson, has been carefully revised, and apart from amendations, rearrange-
ments and additions suggested by advancing knowledge, takes more cogni-
zance of fossil forms, without which a just survey of animal progress is
impossible. The short section on tissue structure has been expanded and
illustrated, and I have made close upon a hundred new figures to supplement
the text and to replace diagrams less suitable, particularly in connection
with animals custonfhrily examined in first courses ...”
Ed 8 1929; Ed 9 1944.
In this case probably the change introduced is not sufficient to justify
regarding Ritchie as the author instead of Thomson.
Example 231;
James Duff Btown/Manual of/Library Economy/Sixth Edition/By/W. C.
Berwick Sayers/Lecturer in Public Library Administration in/The University
of London School/of Librarianship/lUustrated/London/Grafton & Co.,/1949.
195
GE2 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
In this case, it is not merely the family name *‘Brown** that is mei^gedin the
title, but the full name including the words forming the personal name. This
may tempt one to treat Brown as the Author of the work, thou|^ his name
does not occur in the Author-Statement. But this would be a violat^n of
the Canon of Asoertainability. This view has a further support in Ed 7 as
example. There what is merged is not the word group ^"James Duff Brown,**
but “James Duff Brown’s.”
While Lock states in the title-page of ed 7 that he has “completely re-
written” the work, Sayers does not say whether he is a reviser or editor. His
name just occurs in the Author Statement on the title-page. This definitely
implies, according to the Canon of Asoertainability, that he should be taken
as the author of the work contained in ed 6. This gains support in the
following words occurring in the preface: “Hardly a page of Brown’s now
remains, but the book was his and his name will always be associated with
it.” This statement is delightedly vague in respect of the conflict of author-
ship. Perhaps this is sufficient ground to infer that the intention is that
Brown should not be taken as the author of the work contained in ed 6.
There is, however, something in usage which may shake a cataloguer from
the straight path laid down by the Canon of Ascertainability. For, in
common usage the book is referred to as “Brown and Sayers.”
Example 232.*
Archbold’s/Pleading, Evidence and Practice/in/Criminal Cases/Thirty-
third Edition/By/T R Fitzwalter Butler/of the Inner Temple and Midland
Circuit, /Barrister-at-Law, Recorder of Neward/and/Marston Grasia/of the
Middle Temple and South Eastern Circuit,/Barrister-at-Law/London/Swect
and Maxwell Limited/2 & 3 Chancery Lane W C 2/1954.
Extract from the Preface:
“The 32nd edition had to incorporate the then very recent and far-reaching
changes introduced into the administration of criminal law by the passing
of the Criminal Justice Act, 1948, and the adaptation of the book so as to
include these manifold new developments was at that time the chief concern
of the editors . . . has necessitated alterations great in number and occasionally
of importance in substance.”
Information about previous editions:
Ed 1 1822 by J. F. Aichbold; Ed 6 1835 by John Jervis; Ed 9 1846 by W. N.
Welsby; Ed 16 Ed 16 1867 by W. Bruce; Ed 22 1900 by AV. F. Craies and G.
Stephenson; Ed 31 1943 by T R F Butler and M Grasia.
In this case more than a century has passed since Archbold wrote his book.
It is still Archbold only in the Irish sense — of the table knife in the family
being still the same which has been used continuously for five hundred years,
each year one and only one part being renewed — handle in one year, blade in
another and so on. The pattern of the book might have been continued but
the thought-content should have become totally different. In this case it is
probably more appropriate to take the word Aichbold as the first word of
196
Airmon’s NAME MERGED GE2
the title, instead of promotiiig it to the Heading, and some other apprc»i>iate
person as the atidior. However, the book is likely to be soti^t under the
word ‘Archbold.* This situation is met by the book getting a title aitiy
as a ^psult of its being a Proper Name Title (See Sec FB 93).
Exanufle 233:
Seat’s List/of Subject Headings/Seventh Edition/By/Bcrtha Margaret
Frick/Associate Professor, School of Library Service, Columbia University/
With Practical Suggestions for the Beginner/in Subject Heading Work,/by
Minnie Earl Sears/New York/The H W Wilson Company/1950.
Extract from the Preface:
‘Tn recognition of Miss Sear’s pioneer and fundamental contributions,
in the sixth edition the title was changed into ‘Sear's List of Subject Head-
ings*, the name by which it is usually cited. . . . New subjects for this edition
have been gathered . . . Many references have been added for these new
subjects as well as for those already in the List, when it seemed desirable.
On the other hand, some of the outmoded references have been removed
. . . Some subjects have been changed to agree with changes made in the
Congress Libraiy headings.”
In this case Frick, responsible for the seventh edition, does not even
designate herself as a reviser or editor. Her name appears in the Author-
Statement and not in the Collaborator Statement in the title-page. But the
content of the book does not diifer from the last edition, which Sears herself
brought out sufficiently to deny to Sear’s name the right of becoming the
heading.
Example 32:
Mellor’s Modcrn/Inorganic Chemistry//?ev/5ed and Edited bylG, D.
Parkes, M.A., D.Phil.,/FelIow of Keble Collegc/Oxford/in collaboration
with/J, W. Mellor, D.Sc.lWith diagrams and illustrationsIhongpadLm^ Green
and co./London. New York, Toronto/(1939).
Preface:
“This new edition of Mellor's Modern inorganic chemistry embodies exten-
sive changes in comparison with the previous editions. . . . Mellor's Modern
inorganic chemistry was first published in 1912 and very quickly achieved
widespread popularity in many parts of the world. It had run to eight
editions . . . when it* became clear that in preparing a further edition and
time had come for a drastic revision and re-arrangement of its contents.
The present volume is the consequence. By the time that this decision
had been made, Dr Mellor was, unfortunately, in failing health, and this in
conjunction with his numerous commitments made it necessary for the work
of revision to be undertaken jointly. Although Dr Mellor passed away
before it could be published, he had given a final revision to the whole of the
joint work in manuscript form; so that the new edition is now issued with
the confidence that it has his full authority.”
197
OE2 CLASSDPIED CATALOGUE CODE
In this case, O D Parkes, the editor has collaborated with Mellor* tibe
original author of the work. The name of the editor and that of the original
author are given in the Collaborator Statement.
This is an unusual case. Virtually during the very life-time of the ^.thor
his name loses its place in the Author Statement and occupies only a secondary
position even in the CoUaborator Statement. But to signify that the book
was that of Mellor, his name has been fused with the very title of the book as
its very first word. Thus those who look for it under the name Mellor in
the catalogue will not miss it. For, the new title is a Proper Name Title.
As such it will have a Proper Name entiy.
Example 33;
May’s Chemistry/of synthetic Drugs/Fifth tdxXionj Revised and rewritten
by/G. Malcolm Dyson/M. A. (Oxon), R.Sc. (London) F.R.I.C., M.I. Chem.
E.F.I.S./i/i consultation with Percy May/D.Sc. (London), F.R.I.C., C.P.A.
(Longmans)./( 1 959).
Preface:
“The fifth edition of this work has very drastic rewriting of all sections.
The enormous growth of the subject since the publication of the fourth
edition in 1939 has made the sub-division into chapters according to chemical
classification unworkable. The broadening of the number of organic chemical
types showing specific therapeutic action has been so great that any attempt
to preserve the original chemical subdivisions would involve much overlap-
ping of chapters. We have therefore redistributed the material according to
the main biological activity of the drugs, except for a part of the field of
chemotherapy where the retention of special sections devoted to the considera-
tion of general antiseptic, dyestuff, sulphonamides and organo-metallic
compounds assist in clarifying the subject matter.”
The fact that the preface is signed by both Dyson and May, confirm that
the fifth edition is a joint product. However, the title-page mentions May as a
consultant to Editor Dyson. In this case May is further removed from
the author’s position than Mellor in the previous example. For, Mellor
was at least a co-editor whereas May is only consultant to the editor.
Example 43;
Garrison and Morton’s/Medical Bibliography/An Annotated Check-list
of Texts/Illustrating the History of Medicine/By/Leslie T Morton/Informa-
tion Officer, British Medical Journal ;/FormerIy LibArian,/St. Thomas’s
Hospital/Medical School/Sccond Edition/London/Andre Deutsch/A Grafton
Book/1961.
Extract from the Introduction to Ed 2:
“The publication of a second edition of this bibliography has provided
opportunity to close some gaps and to bring the book into line with recent
discoveries in medicine. Several sections have been considerably expanded
and the whole work has been completely overhauled, although no attempt
198
author’s name merged * GE2
has been made to come close to the present in all subjects. About 1»400
entries have added and a few removed. The total nun^ of items (6,908)
includes some 3,800 from Garrison’s original Check LisC*
l^cltract from the Introduction to Ed I
**To Sir William Osier belongs the credit of first suggesting such a wm'k
as this. The late Fielding H Garrison carried his suggestion into effect,
and the list compiled by him appeared in the Index^Catalogue of the Library
of the SurgeonrGenerals Office^ Washington, 1912, 2nd Series, xvii, 89-178.
Garrison himself wrote that he used the list “as convenient scaffolding for
a book on the history of medicine . . . Later Garrison revised the list and
republished it in the Bulletin of the Institute of the History of Medicine^
Baltimore, 1933; i, 333-434, entitling it, A Revised Students* Check-List
of Texts Illustrating the History of Medicine,” and it is this later Check-
List which forms the basis of the present work. Much has been added and
a little deleted. The Check-List 1933 contained 4,186 entries, of which
3,826 have been retained, and to which 1,680 new entries have been added.
. . . Many sections have been expanded, and modem representative works
have been added in most sections.”
In the title-page of ed 1 of the work, the name of Morton occurs in the
Collaborator Statement, as a reviser. But in ed 2 his name occurs in the
Author-Statement of the title-page.
Example 52:
Blakiston'sfScw Gould/Medical Dictionary//4 modern comprehensive
dictionary of the terms used in/all branches of medicine and allied sciences,
including/we<f/cu/ physics and chemistry^ dentistry ^ pharmacy I nursing, veterinary
medicine, zoology and botany, as welljas medico — legal terms with illustrations
and /flWej/Editors/Harold Wellington Jones, M. D./Normand L Hoerr,
M. D./Arthur Osol, Ph.D/with the co-operation of an Editorial Board/and
80 contributors/252 illustrations on 45 plates, 129 in color/First Edition/The
Blakiston Company/Philadelphia. Toronto/ 1951.
Preface:
Blakiston' s New Gould Medical Dictionary is a completely new reference
work. Based upon Gould^s Medical Dictionary, which through many editions
since 1890 has carried on the tradition of scholarship laid down by the first
editor, this new werk reflects, much more accurately and thoroughly than
could a mere revision, the advances of recent years in the various fields of
medicine and the allied sciences. The Editors were convinced that even the
most judicious modernization of older material would prove inadequate
to the need. They therefore undertook the preparation of an entirely new
work — a task which they approached with full realization of its difficulty
and one which they now complete with an enhanced realisation of the problems
and complexities of modem lexicography.”
The progressive changes in the title of this work are worth recording.
199
GE2 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
What is more, with every change in title, edition numbering is restarted with
one. Here is the table of information:
Title
Year
EdN
New Medical Dictionary
Illustrated Dictionary of Medicine, Biology, and Allied
1890
^
1
Sciences
1894
1
Dictionary of Medical Terms
1904
1
Gould's Medical Dictionary
1926
1
1928
2
1931
3
1935
4
1941
5
Blakiston's New Gould Medical Dictionary
/1949
1
11956
2
(current)
3 Variety of Practices
The above examples indicate the possibility of the following varieties of
practices:
Original Author's Name
in the title-page
Collaborator's Name
given in the title-page
in the place of
See Example
N given in
Sec 2
(1)
(2)
(3)
1 Merged in the title and also re-
tained in the place of the Author’s
name
1 1 (Omitted altogether)
12 Collaborator’s Name
13 Author’s Name
14 (No Collaborator)
11
14
2 Merged in the title, but not re-
tained in the place of the Author’s
Name
21 (Omitted altogether)
22 Collaborator’s Name
23 Author’s Name
221; 222
231; 232;
233
3 Merged in the title, not retained
in the place of Author’s Name, but
mentioned in the Collaborator
Statement
31 (Omitted altogether)
32 Collaborator’s Name
33 Author’s Name
32; 33
4 Merged in the title along with
Collaborator’s Name
41 (Omitted altogether)
42 Collaborator’s Name
43 Author’s Name
43
5 Merged in the title but occulted
by the first word of the title being
that of the publisher
51 (Omitted altogether)
52 Collaborator’s Name
53 Author’s Name
52
No doubt no example has been given for 12, 13, 21, 31, 33, 41, 42, 51, and
53. But examples may be forthcoming, if they do not already exist.
author’s name merged GE5
4 The Conflict
Whose name are we to use as the heading of the Main Entry in
suclRcases ? That is the conflict. At a deeper level, this question
implies another, namely, who is the author of the successive
editions of the work ?
The person who easily has the knowledge to resolve the conflict
is the one who brings out the later editions. Even the decision
by him is subject to common human frailties affecting him. He
may be too sentimental and either give the name of the originai
author as The Author in the title page and give his own name only
as a collaborator, or he may even omit his name altogether from
the title-page, even when more than half of the work embodied in
the new edition is different from the work of the original edition.
At the other extreme, an egotistic editor of a new edition may
omit the name of the original author and insert his own name as
the author even though the change in the work embodied in the
new edition is much less than half of the original work. The
merging of the name of the original author in the title may be due
to one of three causes:
1 It may be in recognition that the frame work designed by
the original author continues to be valid though the details need
change from time to time.
2 It may be out of deference to the memory of the original
author.
3 It may be as a means of having the benefit of the goodwill
established for the work by the original author.
5 Follow the Canon of Ascertainability
The safest course to determine the choice of the heading is to
rely on the Canoq of Ascertainability — ^that is, by what is indicated
in the title-page, rather than sit in judgement over what is given in
the title-page.
201
GE6 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
6 Hie Result
The result of so relying on the Canon of Ascertainability will be as follows:
Exanq>le N as
Heading to be chosen ^
^iven in Sec 2
9
11
Dewey (Melvil)
14
Rider (Fremont)
221
Lock (R Northwood), Rev,
222
Ritichie (James), Rev.
231
Sayers (William C Berwick)
232
Butler (T R Fitzwalter)
233
Frick (Bertha Margaret)
32
Parkes (G D) and Mellor (J W), Ed,
33
Dyson (G Malcolm), Ed,
43
Morton (Leslie T)
52
Jones (Harold Wellington) etc, Ed,
7 A Suggestion
Even if the Canon of Ascertainability is adhered to, this class of books
would baffle the Canon of Consistency. Perhaps this stage of uncertainty
is neither necessary nor unavoidable. The Entry Statements for Author
and the Collaborator to be given at the back of the title can be used by the
person responsible for an edition to indicate clearly what the intention is.
If the name of the original author should go only with the title, his name
should not be mentioned on the back of the title-page. Further, the role of
the person responsible for the edition should be definitely described on the
back of the title-page. The Standards Organisations in different countries
and the International Standards Organisation should strive to bring such a
standard into vogue.
202
NAME
PART H
OF PERSON
CHAPTER HA
%
INTRODUCTION
Examples will be found in Chap JA, Part 4 and in the later Sec of
this Chap,
0 Places of Occurrence
A Name-of-Person occurs in most of the entries of a library catalogue.
It occurs in the Headings of entries. It also occurs in their Title-Sections.
In a Heading it may occur as the name of an Author, or of a Collaborator of
one kind or another, or of a person forming the subject of study, or of a
person whose name forms the title of a document. It may occur in a Title-
Section in any of the above ways except as name of author. The variety of
ways in which a Name-of-Person can occur increases the frcQuency of its
occurrence in entries. A Catalogue Code has, therefore, to pay special
attention to a Name-of-Person. Its features creating problems in cataloguing
are:
1 The number of words in it;
2 Their grammatical nature;
3 Their functions;
4 Their sequence;
5 Their relative potency; and
6 The complexities in their structure.
1 Number of Words
In the far-off days, the number of persons writing books was small. Forma-
tion of homonym among names of authors was not frequent. Therefore
the name of an author often consisted of one word only<~such as, Valmiki,
Homer, and Kalidasa. However, the increase in the number of persons
writing and written upon has led to many-worded Names-of-Persons. Apart
from the need to have an extra word to resolve homonym, additional words
began to cumulate for one reason or other. In Names-of-Persons of Arabic
origin or influence, <we come across the largest number of words. Is the
cataloguer to retain all these words in the Headings in full ? Can any of
the words be removed ? Can any of the words be abbreviated ? Such
questions arise today. An author himself reduces some of the words in his
name to their initial letters. Is the cataloguer to retain them as they are ?
Or, is he to expand them to their full names ?
2 Nature of the Words
The essential words in a Name-of-Person are Proper Nouns. Some
205
HA2 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
Naioes-of-Fersoiis indude also common nouns and auxiliary words, such as
artide, prq)osidon, and adjective. When the language of a Name-of-Person
is quite foreign to the cataloguer, it may be difficult for him to recognise the
the nature of the Words. Modem intercourse among nations bring^ into a
library books published in diverse languages. It will be difficult for any
cataloguer to know all the languages. This causes a difficulty. Can the
Catalogue Code provide any aid in this matter ?
3 Functloiis of the Words
Some help can be formulated as we consider the functions of the words in
a Name-of-Person. The Proper Nouns are irremovable.
31 Proper Noun
Some of the Proper Nouns denote the Given Name of the person. These
words are essential in the Name. One or two of the words may denote the
Family Name. It occurs in some cultural groups; and it does not occur in
others.
32 Common Noun
Common Nouns may or may not occur in a Name-of-Person. If they do,
tbesy may denote some attributes of the person such as academic, civic, military,
ritualistic, or other distinction, or the profession of the person or some or his
dominant ancestors. They may also denote denomination by caste, creed,
or religion. Some may be terms of respect. Most of these are removable.
Some are irremovable attachments to the proper nouns in certain cultural
groups. Can the Catalogue Code help the cataloguer of a foreign culture to
distinguish between the removable and the irremovable common nouns ?
33 Auxiliary Word
The auxiliary words are peculiar to certain cultural groups only. They
occur between the Given Name and the Family Name. They are deemed
irremovable.
4 Sequence of the Words
Every conceivable sequence is found in a Name-of-Person among the
Given Name, the Family Name, and the common nouns, and the auxiliary
words.
41 Position of Common Noun
The common nouns may lie at the very beginning, or at the end, or any-
where in the middle as in Buddhistic or Viet-Namese Names-of-Persons.
They cannot, therefore, be spotted out in every case by their position, and
removed.
206
iNTR<M>ucrnoN HA53
42 Family Name at the end
In a Name-of-Pterson of European, Japanese, Marathi, Gujarathi, Sindhi,
Kashmiri, Bengali, Oriya, and Assamese cultural groups, the Family Name
occurs^Lst; and the Given Name precedes it Of the words forming the
Given-Name the one specific to the individual usually comes first; and those
of father, godfather, or patron may come thereafter in European, Marathi,
and Gujarathi Names.
43 Family Name at the Beginning
In a Name-of-Person of Chinese, Viet-Namese, Malayalam, Kannada,
and Telugu cultural groups, the Family Name comes first and the words of
the Given Name come thereafter.
44 Given Name the Last Proper Noun
In a Name-of-Person of Tamil, Malayalam, Kannada, Telugu and Viet-
Namese cultural groups, the last proper noun is usually the Name specific
to the individual.
45 Tamil Name
In Tamil the preceding proper nouns may be the names of father and place
of birth or place of ancestors.
46 Burmese and Hindi Names
In a Name-of-Person of the Burmese cultural group and in some Names-
of-Persons of the Hindi cultural group, the Given Name alone occurs without
any other proper nouns.
5 Potency of the Words
51 Common Noun
If there is any conunon noun in a Name-of-Person, which is an irremovable
attachment, it has no potency as a result of its being a common noun. It
has no claim to become the Entry Element.
52 Proper Noun
Among the proper nouns, either the Family Name, or the word in the
Given Names specific to the individual, may have greater potency than the
other.
53 PoTEOT Family Name
In Western, Japanese, and Chinese names, the Family Name is drawn from
a far more extensive and larger group of words than the Given Name. The
group of the former runs to many thousands, while the group of the latter
does not have more than a thousand words or so. Therefore, in a Name-of-
207
HAS3 CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
Pmon in those cultural groups, the Family Name has a greater potency than
the Given Name. It has, therefore, a greater right than the Given Name to
become the Entry Element.
54 Viet-Nam ^
On the other hand, in a Name-of-Person of the Viet-Namese culture, th»
Family Name has to be only one out of about two hundred words. It is,
therefore, not usual to make it the Entry Element.
55 Thailand
In Thai culture, the Family Name was brought into use only after 1916.
Its number is still small. It is, therefore, not usual to make it the Entry
Element.
56 Bengal
In a Name-of-Person of Bengali culture, the Family Name has to be drawn
from a group of less than 1000 words; while the Given Name has a very
large group running to many thousands to draw from. In spite of this, the
English-educated persons prefer to give the Family Name the status of Entry
Element. But there is a section of opinion in Bengal which would deny it
that status.
57 Potent Given Name
Generally speaking in Indian, Burmese, Ceylonese, and Islamic cultural
groups, the Given Name has great potency. It is chosen as Entry Element
in a Name-of-Person in Tamil, Malayalam, Kannada, Telugu, Burmese,
Ceylonese and Islamic cultural groups.
58 Names for Investigation
The relative numerousness of the reservoir of Family Names and Given
Names in the Marathi, Gujarathi, Hindi, Oriya, and Assamese cultures
needs investigation, to see if the status of Entry Element given to the Family
Name satisfies the Canon of Prepotence.
6 Complexities of Structure
61 Compound Name
Compound Family Names and Given Names form one kind of complexity
in Names-of-Persons. In some cases the components are linked by a hyphen
or by a conjunction or by some other auxiliary word. In some other cases
there is no such visible indication that two or more words together form
a compound Family Name or a compound Given Name. This happens in
Names-of-Persons in Bengali, Marathi, Gujarathi, Sinhalese, and the Islamic
cultural groups of India and Pakistan. Can the Catalogue Code give aid to
foreign catalogues in this matte ?
•
208
INTRODUCTION HA7
62 Name of Married Woman
A Compound Family Name among the Names of married women of some
of the European cultural groups present great difficulty. It is a compound
of the Family Names of the Husband and the Wife. Their sequence varies.
The connecting word also is not the same. Their claim to the status of
Entry Element cannot be determined by their position alone. Can the Cata-
logue Code give aid to foreign cataloguers in this matter ?
63 Auxiliary Word
The auxiliary word between Given Name and Family Name in European
cultural groups gives difficulty. In some it is deemed to go with the Family
Name and in some others with the Given Name. Here again can the Cata-
logue Code give aid to foreign cataloguers ?
64 Arabic Name
The Names based on Arabic culture present peculiarities of their own.
These will become clear in Chap HF, dealing with the rendering of such
names.
7 Cultural Impact
• To add to the five important problem-cases pointed out in the preceding
sections as needing special aid from the Catalogue Code, more tantalising
problems are created as a result of the cultural impact between different
cultural groups. It leads to imitation as well as counter-imitation. The
order of King Rama VI of Thailand calling for the adoption of Surnames by
all his people and arranging to confer them officially was a result of his travel
in Europe. But in spite of its adoption, the surname has not been made the
Entry Element. In Bengal, there is conflict between Family Names and
Given Names as stated in Sec HA5, as a result of British contact. In Uttar-
Pradesh and Punjab, Family Name came into vogue as a result of British
impact. But the dropping of the Family Name has begun in more recent
years. While the Muslims of India and Pakistan do not generally go in
for Family Name, a few do so. In some places, but not in all, the Christians
imitate the West. In Indonesia, the father's name is being treated as if it
were Family Name, just during the present generation. This vogue may or
may not be continued. In Bengal and Uttar-Pradesh, and to a smaller degree
in other areas, the Given Name, which is a single word, is broken into two
parts and written out as if they were two distinct words, — Ganesh Prasad
instead of Ganeshprasad, Prithvi Nath instead of Prithvinath, Sankara
Narayanan instead of Sankaranarayanan, and Vidya Bhushan instead of
Vidyabhushan. As a result of British contact, some contract the former of
these two parts into its initial letter and use the second part as it if w6re the
true name by itself. In the name of Sir C V Raman, the real name should
be C Venkataraman. Some abbreviate all the proper nouns into their res-
♦ 209
14
HA7 CLASSIHED GATAJLOaUB CWB
pective initial tetters and retain only the last attached common noim in iaXL
ASP Ayyar is an example. It should be A S Panchapakesa Ayyar. Ayyat
is a common noun attached to the proper noun.
8 Towards Aid
The terminology introduced and the procedure laid down in the succeeding
sections of this chapter, tak^ along with the Rules on the rendering of
Names^of-Persons, form a sample of one way in which a Catalogue Code
can give some aid to foreign cataloguers. The best aid can come only by the
implementation of the standard for Entry Statement for Author (See Sec
HG 5).
210
CHAFUER HB
♦
TERMINOLOGY : SIMPLE NAME
1 Introdaetion
In tny rqxnt to Unesco on Asian Names [RRl], I developed a certain
tnminology in the process of probing into the structure of a Name^-Petson
and the problem of rendering it in the Heading of an Entry. Perhaps some
of these terms may be of help in the further pursuit of diis problem. They
are therefore given here.
2 Name-of-Penon
2 Nunemf-Person. — ^Word or set of words arranged in a
definite sequence and used to denote a person.
21 Name. — ^Name-of-Person.
This briefer term will be used in any context where it is not likely to denote
any entity other than a person.
3 Kinds of Word-Group
31 Given Name
Word or word-group usually given to a person, shortly after
birth, as the individual’s name, by the parents or their deputy.
It consists of proper nouns. It is ako denoted by the terms
Christian Name, Personal Name, Forename, and First Name.
•
The last two terms are valid only in Western, Jt^anese, Marathi, Gujaratfai,
and Bmgali Names. In Tamil, Malayalam, Kannada, Telugu, Sinhalese,
Viet-Namese, and Indonesian Names, it is the last proper noun. In Iffindi
and Punjabi also, it may be the last proper noun in some cases. But it may
be followed by a common noun (See Sec HB33). In Maradii, Gujarathi,
Kashmiri, Puqjabi, Hindi, Assamese, Bengali, and Chiya names, it is die
first inoper noun. But it may be preceded by a ccmunon noun or other
hottorifics. (See Sec HB34).
211
HB32
CtASaOIED CATALOCtUE «»}£
32 Family Name
32 FarnHy Name. — Word or word-group normally inherited
by a person as denoting the name of his family. It consi^s of
proper noun(s). It is also denoted by the terms Surname and
Last Name.
The last term is valid only in Western, Japanese, Marathi, Gujarathi,
Bengali, and Hindi names. In Chinese, Viet-Namese, Malayalam, Kannada,
and Telugu names, it is the First Name.
33 Irremovable Attachment
33 Irremovable Attachment. — A Word or word-group made of
common nouns attached after the Given Name, deemed to be an
Irremovable Attachment to the Given Name, and always taken
along with it.
It is difficult for a foreign cataloguer to recognise an Irremovable Attach-
ment. Therefore, the next Sec provides some aid in this respect.
331 The following list gives some of the oft-recurring Irremov-
able Attachments in names of Burmese, Ceylonese, Hindi,
Kannada, Malayalam, Punjabi, Telugu, and Tamil cultural
groups. Similar lists should be prepared for other cultural
groups.
Note:
1 The language of the word is enclosed in brackets in most cases.
2 If a word may occur in two or more languages, all the languages are
given within. the brackets.
3 Variants due to transliteration are listed in many cases.
4 In Burmese, the liremovable Attachment occurs as a Prefix and in all
other languages as a Suffix.
5 In Islamic name, the Irremovable Attachment ^ay be a Prefix or a
Suffix.
Abhar (Tamil)
Achar (Kannada)
Acharaya (Telugu)
Acharayalu (Telugu)
Acharayalu (Telugu)
Achari (Kannada)
Achariar (Tamil)
Acharya (Kannada/Tamil)
Achchan (Malayalam)
Adigal (Tamil)
Agha (Islamic)
Agha (Islamic)
Aiya (Tamil/Telugu)
Aiyangar (Tamil)
212
imMlNOLOGY: SIMPLE NAME
HB331
Aiyar (Kaiinada/Malayalam/
Tamil)
Aiyengar (Kannada)
Aiye]»(Kannada)
Al^ (Kannada)
Alwar (Tamil)
Amba (Kannada/Tamil)
Ambal (Kannada)
Ambalakkarar (Tamil)
Ambalavasi (Tamil)
Amma (Kannada/Malayalam/
Tamil/Ccylon)
Ammaiyar (Tamil)
Ammal (Tamil)
Ammanni (Kannada)
Anna (Kannada/Tamil)
Annavi (Tamil)
Annaiya» Annaya (Kannada)
Anniah (Kannada)
Appa (Kannada/Tamil)
Appiah, Appaiya, Appaji, Appana,
Appaya (Kannada)
Appu (Ceylon)
Appusamy (Ceylon)
Aradbya (Kannada)
Arasu (Kannada)
Arya (Kannada/Tamil)
Aryan (Kannada)
Asan (Malayalam/Tamil)
Asari (Tamil)
Atiyodi (Malayalam)
Atreya (Telugu)
Avadhani (Kannada/Tamil)
Avadhaniar (Tamil)
Ayya (Kannada)
Ayyangar (Kannada/Tamil)
Ayyar (Kannada/Tamil)
Babu (Tamil/Telugif)
Bagavathar (Tamil)
Bai (Kannada/Tamil)
Banda (Ceylon)
Bandara (Ceylon)
Bayi (Kannada)
Bhadra (Kannada)
Bhadran (Kannada)
Bhar (Hindi/Punjabi)
Bharati (Tamil)
Bharatiar (Tamil)
Bhat (Tamil)
Bhatta (Kannada)
Bhatta (Kannada/Tamil/
Telugu)
Bhattachari (Tamil)
Bhattacharya (Kannada)
Bhattar (Tamil)
Bhattatiri (Malayalam)
Bhattatiripad (Malayalam)
Bhan (Hindi/Punjabi)
Bhupala (Telugu)
Bhusan, Bhushana (Kannada)
Bhushan (Hindi/Punjabi)
Bihari (Hindi/Punjabi) »
Bihari Lai (Hindi/Punjabi)
Boyi (Kannada)
Chand (Hindi/Punjabi)
Chander (Hindi/Punjabi)
Char, Chari, Charya (Kannada)
Chauduri (Telugu)
CTietti (Kannada/Tamil)
Chettiyar (Tamil)
Chetty, Chettiar (Kannada)
Das (Kannada/Tamil)
Dasa (Kannada)
Dasan (Tamil)
Dasappa (Kannada)
Dass (Hindi/Punjabi)
Dasu (Tamil/Tclugu)
Daw (Burmese)
Dayal (Hindi/Punjabi)
Deo (Hindi/Punjabi)
Desika (Kannada)
Desikan (Tamil/Kannada)
Desikar (Tamil/Kannada)
Dev (Hindi/Kannada/Punjabi)
Deva, Devaru (Kannada)
Devi (Tamil)
Dhar
Dikshit (Kannada)
Dikshitalu (Telugu)
Dikshitan(r) (Tamil)
Ditta (Hindi/Punjabi)
Dorai (Tamil)
213
HB331
CLASSIFIED CATALO0UB COSm
Elayatu (Malaya*
lam)
Embirandri (Malayalam)
Badiuthatchan (Malayalam)
Oiri (Kannada)
Gowd, Gowda (Kannada)
Gownd, Gownden, Gownder
(Kannada/Tanul)
Gramani (Tamil)
Gupta (Kannada)
Gurukkal (Malayalam)
Haji (Islamic)
Hakim (Islamic)
Hami (<>ylon)
Hamina (Ceylon)
Hegde, Heggade (Kannada)
lah (Kannada)
lya (Kannada)
Iyengar (Kannada/Tamil)
Iyer (Kannada/Tamil)
Jain
Jatavallabhan(r) (Tamil)
Jetty (Kannada)
Jogi (Kannada)
Jois, Joisa, Joshi (Kannada)
Josi (Tamil)
Josiyar (Tamil)
Josyer (Kannada)
Jotidar (Tamil)
Kaimal (Malayalam)
Kamath (Kannada)
Kander (Tamil)
Karan (Hindi/Punjabi)
Karanth(a) (Kannada)
Karayalar (Tamil)
Kartha (Malayalam)
Kavi (Telugu)
Kavipjnan (Tamil)
Kavirayan(r) (Tamil)
Khau (Islamic)
Khwaja (Islamic)
Kirth (Hindi/Punjabi)
Kirthi (Kannada)
Kishen (Hindi/Punjabi)
Kishore (Hindi/Punjabi)
Kizhar (Tamil)
214
KoCStmneae)
Konan(r) (Tamil)
Kone (Tamil)
Kounder (Tamil)
Krishen (Hindi/Punjabi)
Kudumban (Tamil)
Kumar (Hindi/Kannada/
Punjabi)
Kumara (Kannada)
Kumari (Hindi/Kannada/ Pun-
jabi/Tamil)
Kumarihami (Ceylon)
Kurukkal (Malayalam)
Kurup ( Malayalam)
Kutti (Malayalam)
Labbai (Tamil)
Lai (Hindi/Punjabi)
Lemaltani (Ceylon)
Linga, Lingan, Lingiah
(Kannada)
Mahavidwan (Tamil)
Maistri (Tamil)
Mai (Hindi/Punjabi)
Mandradiyar (Tamil)
Manigar (Tamil)
Manikkaran(r) (Tamil)
Mannadiyar (Malayalam)
Mappillai (Malayalam)
Marakkayar (Tamil)
Marar (Malayalam)
Maung (Burmese)
Melakaran (Tamil)
Menike (Ceylon)
Menon (Malayala m)
Mian (Islamic)
Mirza (Islamic)
Mohan (Hindi/Punjabi)
Molvi (Islamic) •
Moopan(ar) (Tamil)
Moorthi, Moorthy, Moorty
(Kannada)
Moosad (Malayalam)
Moulavi (Islamic)
Mudaliar (Tamil)
Mufti (Islamic)
Murthi (Kannada/Tamil)
immmiOQY: $iMm namb
HB331
Murtby (Telugu)
Marti (Kannada)
Miirty (Kannada)
Nadh^^ (TamiO
Naicken (Tamil)
Naidu (Tamil/Telugu)
Naik (Kannada)
Nair (Malayalam)
Nambi (Malayalam/Tami!)
Nambisan (Malayalam)
Nambudri (Malayalam)
Nambudripad (Malayalam)
Namburi (Malayalam)
Nand (Hindi/Punjabi)
Nandan(r) (Tamil)
Narain (Hindi/Punjabi)
Nath (Hindi/Kannada/Punjabi)
Natha, Nathan (Kannada)
Nattan(r) (Tamil)
Navalan(r) (Tamil)
Nawab (Islamic)
Nawabzada (Islamic)
Nayadu (Tamil/Telugu)
Nayak (Kannada)
Nayaka (Kannada/Telugu)
Nayakadu (Telugu)
Nayakan(r) (Tamil)
Nayaki (Kannada/Tamil)
Nayanar (Tamil)
Nayar (Malayalam)
Nedungadi (Malayalam)
Odeya (Kannada)
Odeyar (Tamil)
Othuvar (Tamil)
Padayachi (Tamil)
Pakir (Tamil)
Pal (Hindi/Puiyabi)
Pandaram (Tamil)#
Pandit (Tamil)
Pandithan(r) (Tamil)
Pandiyan (Tamil)
Pani (Kannada)
Panickar, Panikker
(Malayalam)
Parkash (Hindi/Punjabi)
Parshad (Hindi/Punjabi)
Pathi, Piathy* Pati» Paty
(Kannada)
Patrachari (Tamil)
Patrudu (Telugu)
Pattanayakan (Tamil)
Pattar (Tamil)
Pavalan(r) (Tamil)
Peer (Islamic)
Peerzada (Islamic)
Penimal (Tamil)
Pilla (Malayalam)
Pillai (Tamil)
Pishoroti (Malayalam)
Poduval (Malayalam)
Potthi (Malayalam)
Prabhu (Tamil/Telugu)
Prakash (Hindi/Kannada/
Punjabi/Telugu)
Prasada (Kannada)
Pujari (Tamil)
Pulavar (Tamil)
Pusari (Tamil)
Qarzi (Islamic)
Rai (Hindi/Punjabi)
Raj (Hindi/Kannada/Punjabi)
Raja (Kannada/Malayalam/
Tamil)
Rajan, Rajiah (Kannada)
Raj Kumar (Hindi/Punjabi)
Raju (Kannada/Tamil/
Telugu)
Ram (Hindi/Punjabi)
Rao (Hindi/Kannada/Purjabi/
Tamil/Telugu)
Rao Naidu (Telugu)
Rasu (Tamil)
Ratnam, Ratna (Kannada)
Rau (Kannada/Tamil)
Rauttar (Tamil)
Raya (Kannada)
Rayalu (Telugu)
Rayappa (Kannada)
Rayaru (Kannada)
Razu, Razulu (Telugu)
Reddi (Tamil/Telugu)
Reddy (Kannada/Taniil)
215
HB331 CIASHFIEO
Roop (Hindi/Tupiabi)
Row (Kannada/Tamil)
Rowthar (Tamil)
Sa (Tamil)
Saheb (Tamil)
Saib (Tamil)
Saila, Sailam (Kannada)
Sain (Hindi/Punjabi)
Sami (Kannada)*
Saran (Hindi/Punjabi)
Saraswati (Tamil)
Sardar (Islamic)
Sarma, Sarman (Kannada/
Malayalam/Tamil/Telugu)
Samp (Hindi/Punjabi)
Sastri, Sastrigal (Kannada/Tamil/
Telugu)
Sastrulu ^elugu)
Sastry (Kannada)
Sawmy (Kannada)
Saya (Kannada)
Sayab (Tamil)
Sayans (Kannada)
Sayed (Islamic)
Sekhar (Kannada)
Sen (Hindi/Punjabi)
Seniyan(r) (Tamil)
Servat (Tamil)
Setty, Setti (Kannada)
Setupathi (Tamil)
Shafzada (Islamic)
Shaik (Islamic)
Sharma (Kannada)
Shastri, Shastry (Kannada)
Shetti, Sbetty (Kannada)
Sholiyan (Tamil)
Shyam
Siddar (Tamil)
Simha (Kannada)
Singh (Hindi/Kannada/
Punjabi/Tamil)
Singho (Ceylon)
Siva (Tamil)
CATALOGUE CODE
Sivachariar (Tamil)
Sivan (Tamil)
Somayaji (Kannada/Tamib
Telugu)
Srouthi (Kannada)
Sub (Islamic)
Sundar (Hindi/Punjabi)
Suri (Kannada)
Swam! (Kannada/Tamil)
Swamigal (Tamil)
Swamy (Kannada)
Swamp (Hindi/Punjabi)
Syed (Islamic)
Tambiran (Tamil)
Tamburan (Malayalam)
Tamburatti (Malayalam)
Tampan (Malayalam)
Tampi (Malayalam)
Tattachari (Tamil)
Thangal (Malayalam)
Thevan(r) (Tamil)
Tirumalpad (Malayalam)
Tooran (Tamil)
Turai (Tamil)
U (Burmese)
Udayar (Tamil)
Unni (Malayalam)
Unnithan (Malayalam)
Vaidhyan(r) (Malayalam)
Vaithiyan (Tamil)
Vajapeyar (Tamil)
Vallal (Tamil)
Vandayar (Tamil)
Varma (Malayalam)
Varriar (Malayalam)
Vathiyar (Tamil)
Velan(r) (Tamil)
Vellalan (Tamil) «
Velu (Tamil)
Warrior (Malayalam)
Wodeyar (Kannada)
Yalaydu (Malayalam)
Yogi (Tamil)
216
l^tMINOLOGY: SIMPUB NAME
34 Removable Attachment
HB34
34 Removable Attachment. — A word or word-group made of
comfiion nouns or adjectives, attached as honorific or courtesy
term after or before or in the middle of a name, deemed removable,
and not to be retained in the Heading of an Entry.
341 The following list gives some of the oft-recurring Remov-
able Attachment in names of Buddhistic, Ceylonese, Indian,
Indonesian, Malayan, and Viet-Namese cultural groups. Similar
lists should be prepared for other cultural groups.
Note:
1 After each word in the succeeding table of Removable Attachment,
the language or the culture of occurrence is mentioned within brackets.
2 It is also mentioned within the brackets whether it will occur as a
prefix or as a suffix or in the middle of the name.
Adigal, Adigalar (Tamil. Suffix)
Adigar (Ceylon. Suffix)
Andavan (Tamil. Suffix)
Andavar (Tamil. Suffix)
Aratchi (Ceylon. Suffix)
Ashtavadanam (Tamil. Prefix)
Asukavi (Tamil. Prefix)
Avar (Kannada/Tamil. Suffix)
Avargal (Tamil. Suffix)
Avaru (Kannada/Tamil. Suffix)
Avarugal, Avarugalu
(Kannada. Suffix)
Ayurveda Bhushanam (Tamil.
Prefix)
Be (Viet-Namese. Middle)
Baba (Hindi/Punjabi. Prefix)
Bakshi (Hindi/Punjabi. Prefix)
Basnayake Nilame (Ceylon Suffix)
Bawa (Hindi/Punjabi. Prefix)
Bhagavatam (Tamil. Preffix)
Bhai (Hindi, Punjabi. Prefix)
Bibi (Punjabi. Prefix)
Brahma Sri (Tamil. Prefix)
Brahma Sri Pandit (Tamil. Prefix)
Brahmesri (Tamil. Suffix)
Brahmesrigal, Brahmesrigalavaru
(Kannada. Suffix)
Chaophya (Thai. Prefix)
Che (Malayan. Prefix)
Choudhury (Hindi/Punjabi.
Prefix)
Chittirakavi (Tamil. Prefix)
Dasu (Tamil. Prefix)
Dato (Malayalan. Prefix)
Dato Nuda (Malayan. Prefix)
Datoh (Malayan. Prefix)
Datoh Panglima (Malayan.
Prefix)
Dekchai (Thai. Prefix)
Dekying (Thai. Prefix),
Dewan (Hindi/Punjabi. Prefix)
Dinh (Viet-Namese. Middle)
Diwan Bahadur (India. Prefix)
Diwan Sahib (India. Prefix)
Disave (Ceylon. Suffix)
Diyawadana Nilame (Ceylon.
Suffix)
Due (Viet-Namese, Middle)
Enche (Malayan. Prefix)
Gal, Galu, Galavaru
(Kannada. Suffix)
Gate-Mudaliyar (Ceylon. Prefix)
Gate-Muhandiram (Ceylon.
Prefix)
217
CLASSIFIED CATALOODE CODS
HBM
Giani (ifindi^iuabi Px^fix)
HiEdi (Malayan. Prefix)
Hakim (Tamil. Prefix)
Huu (Viet-Natnese. Middle)
Inche (Malayalan. Prefix)
Jagatguni (Tamil. Prefix)
Jalaviddai (Tamil. Prefix)
Jathidar (Punjabi. Prefix)
Jatida Bhushanam (Tamil.
Prefix)
Kanwar (Punjabi. Prefix)
Katikacarya (Ceylon. Title
Prefix)
Kaviraj (India. Prefix)
Kaviraj Pandithan (Tamil.
Prefix)
Kaze (Tamil. Prefix)
Khun (Thai. Prefix)
Koon (Thai. Prefix)
Koonnai (Thai. Prefix)
Koonnylng (Thai. Prefix)
Korale Mahatmaya (Ceylon.
Suffix)
Kumari (India. Prefix/Suffix)
Lala (Hindi/Punjabi. Prefix)
Lekam (Ceylon. Suffix)
Lung (Thai. Prefix)
Madhusri (Tamil)
Madura (Indonesian. Prefix)
Madurakavi (Tamil. Prefix)
Mahacarya (Ceylon. Title Pi®fix)
Maha Mudaliyar (Ceylon. Prefix)
Maharaj (India. Prefix/SufiSx)
Maharshi (India. Suffix)
Mabopadyaya (Tamil. Prefix)
Makan (Tamil. Suffix)
Malik (Punjabi. Prefix and
Suffix)
Maniyagar (Ceylon. Suffix)
Mas (Indonesia. Prefix)
Master (Hindi/PunJabi. Prefix)
Mian (Hindi/Punjabi. Prefix)
Moulvi (India. Prefix)
Mudaliyar (Ceylon, Prefix)
Muhandiram (Ceylon. Prefix)
Munivar (Tamil, Suffix)
218
Mim^ (India. Suffix)
Nai (Thai. Prefix)
Nang (Thai. Prefix)
Nangsao (Thai. Prefix) ^
Nawab (India. Prefix)
Nawabzada (India. Prefix)
Nawabram (Tamil. Prefix)
Nilame (Ceylon. Middle)
Nu (Viet-Namese. Middle)
Padikara Mudaliyar (Ceylon.
Prefix)
Padikara Muhandiram (Ceylon.
Prefix)
Padukasevakan (Tamil. Prefix)
Pandit (Hindi/Punjabi/Ceylon.
Prefix)
Pandita (Ceylon. Prefix)
Panditacarya (Ceylon. Prefix)
Panjangam (Tamil. Prefix)
Paramahamsa (Tamil. Prefix)
Paravastu (Tamil. Prefix)
Phra (Thai. Prefix)
Phya (Thai. Prefix)
Prathivathi bayankara (Tamil.
Prefix)
Pujjya Pandita (Ceylon. Prefix)
Pulavar (Tamil. Prefix)
Quf (Viet-Namese, Middle)
Raden (Indonesia. Prefix)
Raden Aryo (Indonesia. Prefix)
Raden Mas (Indonesia. Prefix)
Raden Pandji (Indonesia.
Prefix)
Rai (Punjabi. Prefix)
Rai Bahadur (India. Prefix)
Rai Sahib (Hindi/Punjabi.
Prefix)
Raizada (Punjabi . Prefix)
Raja (Malayan. Prefix)
Raja Bahadur (Tamil. Prefix)
Rajah (India. Prefix)
Raja Mrutyjaya Nisanka
Raj Kumari (India. Prefix)
Rana (Hindi/Punjabi. Pre^)
Rao Bahadur (India. Prefix)
Rao Sahib (India. Prefix)
terminology: simh.b name
HB35
Rate Mahatnaaya (O^lon.
Suffix)
Ratnakum (Tamil. Prefix)
Rishi flPunuab. Prefix)
Ru (fumnada/Tamil. Suffix)
Sadavatanam (Tamil. Prefix)
Sadguru (Tamil. Prefix)
Sahitya Siromani (India/Ceylon.
Prefix)
Sahitya Visarada (tndia/Ceylon.
Prefix)
Sami (Tamil. Suffix)
Sannadigal (Tamil. Suffix)
Sardar (India. Prefix)
Sardar Bahadur (Punjab. Prefix)
Sardar Sahib (Punjab. Prefix)
Sastri (Hindi/Punjabi. Prefix)
Sastracarya (Ceylon. Prefix)
Sastra Visarada (India/Ceylon.
Prefix)
Seth (Punjab. Prefix)
Si (Viet-Namcse. Middle)
Sodasavatanam (Tamil. Prefix)
Sodasavatani (Tamil. Prefix)
Soetan (Indonesia. Prefix)
Sowbhagyavati (Tamil. Suffix)
Sri (India/Ceylon. Prefix.
Suffix)
Sridhasri (Tamil. Suffix)
Sri-la-Sri (Tamil. Prefix)
Sriman (Tamil. Prefix)
Srimathi (India. Prefix)
Srungarakavi (Tamil. Prefix)
Sultan (Malayan. Prefix)
Swami (India. Prefix)
Swamigai (Tamil. Suffix)
Syed (Malayan. Prefix)
Thakur (Hindi/Pucijabi. Prefix)
Thi (Viet-Namese. Middle)
Tikka (Punjabi. Prefix)
Tim (Tamil. Prefix)
Timmathi(Tami]. Prefix)
Timvalar ffamil. Prefix)
Toh (Malayan. Prefix)
Trong (Viet-Namese. Middle)
Tuan (Malayan. Prefix)
Tungku (Malayan. Pr^)
Udayar (Ceylon. Sufiix)
Ungku (Malayan. Prefix)
Vaid (Hindi/Punjabi. Prefix)
Vaidraj (Hindi/Punjabi. Pr^)
Van (Viet-Namese. Middle)
Vanniyar (Ceylon. Sufiix)
Varakavi (Tamil. Prefix)
Veda Aratchi (Ceylon. Prefix)
Veda Mudaliyar (Ceylon.
Prefix)
Veda Muhandiram (Ceylon.
Prefix)
Velvidance (Ceylon. Sufiix)
Vi (Viet-Namese. Middle)
Vidan Aratchi (Ceylon. Suffix)
Vidane (Ceylon. Suffix)
Vidwan (Tamil. Prefix)
Vidya Visarada (India/Ceylon.
Prefix)
Viet (Viet-Namese. Middle)
Visarada (India/Ceylon. Prefix)
Wan (Malayan. Prefix)
Yang Mutia (Malayan. Prefix)
35 Irremovable Auxiliary Word
35 Irremoyable Auxiliary Word. — An article or a preposition,
or a combination of article and preposition, or any other auxiliary
word occurring between the Given Name and the Family Name.
It is usually retained in the Heading of an Entry.
A list of the articles in some of the languages is given in Sec £C1. Fre<*
positions and their combinations with articles can be easily recognised.
219
HB3S CXASSIFIBD CATAUXiUE CODE
This list should be comideted and sunilar lists should be prepared £or
other languages.
36 Abbreviated Word
36 Abbreviated Word. — ^A proper noun in a Name, not fully
spelt out but abbreviated to one or more initial letters, either
habitually by the person himself, or in public usage or reference,
or in the title-page, or anywhere else in the preliminary pages, or
elsewhere in the document.
Examples:
1 J Boswell
for
James Boswell
2
A W Cardinall
for
Allen Wolsey Cardinall
3
G W C Kaye
for
George William Clarison Kaye
4
BCPal
for
Bepin Chandra Pal
5
SNSen
for
Surendar Nath Sen
6
R P Sood
for
Ramraksh Pal Sood
7
A J Wells
for
Arthur James Wells
220
CHAPTER HC
TERMINOLOGY : COMPOUND NAME
1 Compound Family Name
I Compound Family Name,— Family Name made up of two
or more proper nouns, either
1 Connected by a hyphen; or
2 Connected by a conjunction or any other kind of auxiliary
word; or
3 Written separately without any connecting symbol or
auxiliary word.
Examples:
The compound Family Name is in Capitals and Small Capitals,
1 Arthur Thomas Quiller-Couch
2 Hermann Schulze-Deutzsch
3 Theodore Watts-Dunton
4 Ricardo Leon y Roman
5 Giorgio Levi della Vida
6 J J Marcuet de Vasselot
7 Roger Martin du Card
8 Garo Merhart von Bernegg
9 Henri Joachim de Bull Nachenots
10 Vicente Antonio de Espirito Santo
I I Dipak Das Gupta
12 Krishna Row Mukund Dixit Patw^ardhan
13 Surendar Nath Basu Ray Chaudhuri
14 Kumara Munindra Deb Rai Mahasai
If the component words of a Compound Family Name are connected
by a hyphen or an auxiliary word as in the first eight of the above examples,
the Compound Name can be easily recognised. In the absence of such
an indicator, it is not possible to recognise it. To help a foreign cataloguer,
there appears to be no aid other than giving a list of Compound Surnames,
unless the International Standard for the Entry Statement for Author on
the back of the title-page (See Sec FL78), prescribing the printing in dominant
type-face the whole compoimd Family Name, is followed. In the meantime
some aid is given in the three succeeding rules for Bengali, Gujarathi, Kannada,
Marathi, and Sinhalese names.
221
HC2
CLASHHEO CATAUtOUB COCKB
2 [^nludese Starter Wnd for Three-Worded FamBy
Name
2 If the last<but-two proper noun in a Sinhalese name is any
one of the following, that word and the next two words taken
together form a Three-Worded Family Name.
Casio D, Da, Do Dias
3 Bengali and Sinhalese Starter Word for Two-Worded
FamUy Name
3 If the penultimate proper noun in a Bengali or a Sinhalese
name is any one of the following, that word and the next word
together form a Two-Worded Family Name.
Abaya (Sinhalese)
Acharya (Bengali)
Ayan (Bengali)
Baidya (Bengali)
Bal (Bengali)
Bandyopadhyay (Bengali)
Barr (Sinhalese)
Barua (Bengali)
Basu (Bengali)
Bej (Bengali)
Bhanja (Bengali)
Biswa (Bengali)
Brito (Sinhalese)
C^asie (Sinhalese)
Chakravorty (Bengali)
Chakrabarti (Bengali)
Chel (Bengali)
Christie (Sinhalese)
Qipos (Sinhalese)
Crosett (Sinhalese)
Das (Bengali)
Datta (Bengali)
De (Bengali, Sinhalese)
Deb (Bengali)
Dias (Sinhalese)
Don (Sinhalese)
Dutta (Bengali)
222
Flamer (Sinhalese)
Gairik (Bengali)
Gandha (Bengali)
Ghose (Bengali)
Ghosh (Bengali)
Gogerly (Sinhalese)
Guha (Bengali)
Gupta (Bengali)
Herat (Sinhalese)
Home (Bengali)
Homer (Sinhalese)
Izadeen (Sinhalese)
Jayasinha (Sinhalese)
Jayaweera (Sinhalese)
Kanja (Bengali)
Kansa (Bengali)
Kar (Bengali)
Kohoban (Sinhalese)
Kuriwita (Sinhalese)
Lata (Bengali)
Lorenz (Sinhalese)
Macan (Sinhalese)
Mallik (Bengali)
Manicka (Sinhalese)
Marika (Sinhalese)
Mendis (Sinhalese)
Mitra (Bengali)
rmi^moLOGY: compound name HC4
NagCBengaU)
Samuel (Sinhalese)
NamaCBen^)
Sarkar (Bengali)
Nandi (Bmgali)
Satra (Bengali)
Omar ^Sinhalese)
Sen (Etogali)
FalCB^IO
Senathi (Sinhalese)
Pandita (Sinhalese)
Sha (Bengali)
Patta (Bengali)
Sharma (Bengali)
Pinto (Sinhalese)
Shukla (Itengali)
Puiita (Sinhalese)
Shyam (Bengali)
Puran (Bengali)
Silva (Sinhalese)
Raj (B^gali)
Singha (Bengali)
Raj^ (Bengali)
Sinha (Bengali)
Ray (Bengali)
Siv (Bengali)
Rudra (Bengali)
Sri (Sinhalese)
Sadhu (Bengali)
Suriya (Sinhalese)
Saha (Bengali)
Syam (Bengali)
Sama (Bengali)
Ihakur (Bengali)
Sacnaddar (Bengali)
Vijaya (Sinhalese)
Compound Family Name without Starter
Woid
4 The following Compound Family Names occur in Gujarathi»
Kannada, Marathi, and Sinhalese names, in addition to those
indicated in Sec HC2 and HC3.
Abhang Ateetakar (Marathi)
Atmaram Bhukhanvala (Guja-
rathi)
Baheli Hon\ji (Gujarathi)
Bal Mahajan (Marathi)
Bapat Dikshit (Marathi)
Barwe Wad (Marathi)
Bhat Peshawe (Marathi)
Bhrugu Shastri (Giuarathi)
Biradar Patil (Kannada)
Chapte Sikhatma (Marathi)
Dehai Kulkarni (Kannada)
Deo Inamadar (Kannada)
Deo Paranjpa (Marathi)
Deodhar Dhamdhere (Marathi)
Desai Kolhatkar (Marathi)
Deva Aditya (Sinhalese)
Dikshi Sana (Marathi)
Dixit Patwardhan (Marathi)
Ehelepola Seneviratne (Sinha«
lese)
Flamer Caldera (Sinhalese)
Gogerly Moragoda (Sinhalese)
Gokhale Raste (Marathi)
Gokhale Tasgaokar (Marathi)
Gora Gandhi (Guyarathi)
Hans Boedkar (Marathi)
Jhaver Laxmichandvala (Gujarathi)
Joshi Ghorpade (Marathi)
Joshi Palashetakar (Marathi)
Kadam Sonsalkar (Marathi)
Kadim Diwan (Kannada)
Kamat Dalai (Marathi)
Kanawade Patil (Marathi)
Kankani Thanki (Gujarathi)
Kara Kalyanavala (Gujarathi)
Kashi Parekh (Gujarathi)
Kathiavad Divapji (Gujarathi)
223
HC4
CLASSIHED CATALOGUE CODE
Khot Bhagwat (Marathi)
Khirasagar Kulkami (Marathi)
Kunte Mahajan (Marathi)
Lohar Khamgaokar (Marathi)
Mahajan Kunte (Marathi)
Maji Patil (Kannada)
Mamle-Desai (Kannada)
Modak Howaldar (Marathi)
Mondhe Kulkarni (Marathi)
Mulki Patil (Kannada)
Mutalik Desai (Kannada)
Mutalik Deshapande (Kannada)
Mutalik Madagouda (Kannada)
Naik Nimbalkar (Marathi)
Naik Thigale (Marathi)
Orpe Potdar (Marathi)
Pai Raikar (Kannada)
Pathak Vadiya (Marathi)
Patil Kulkami (Kannada)
Pawar Bane (MaraUii) ’
Pestan Jampsa (Gujarathi)
Phadtari Deshmuk (Marathi)
Phaphe Manohar (Marathi)
Prabhu Desai (Kannada) *
Prabhune Pisarwakar (Marathi)
Puranic Dikshit (Kannada)
Raje Shirke (Marathi)
Salunke Rao (Marathi)
Saraf Wakde (Marathi)
Savare Bhagavat (Marathi)
Sawant Tirawadekar (Marathi)
Shamal Becharvala (Gujarathi)
Soman Narawana (Marathi)
Thorat Gadgil (Marathi)
Ulli Pradhan (Kannada)
Vachchha Gandhi (Gujarathi)
Vaidya Shastri (Gujarathi)
Varmani Thanki (Gujarathi)
5 Compound Given Name
5 Compound Given Name. — Given Name made up of two or
more proper nouns, either
1 Connected by a hyphen, or
2 Connected by a conjunction or any other auxiliary word;
or
3 Written separately without any connecting symbol or
auxiliary word.
If the component words of a Compound Given Name are connected by
a hyphen or by an auxiliary word, the compound name can be easily
recognized.
In a Namc-of-Person of a cultural group, which invariably ends or begins
with a Family Name, it is not of very great importance that one should
recognize a set of words in the Given Name as a Cdhipound. Generally
speaking, this is true of a Western, Japanese, Assamese, Bengali, Gujarathi,
Kashmiri, Marathi, or Oriya name, each of which ends with a Family Name.
This is also true of a Chinese or Viet-Namesc name, each of which begins
with a Family Name.
But in a Name-of-Person without a Family Name, the Given Name will
have to be made the Entry Element. In a Gujarathi or a Marathi name
of a period prior to early nineteenth century, Family Name was not used
224
terminology: compound name
HC5
many authors and the Given Name began with a name specifk? to the
individual and ended with the name specific to his father. But neither of
these was a compound name. In any other cultural group where the Given
Name has to be made the Entry Element, it is often the last proper noun
in the hame — i e, it will be the last noun barring any common noun which
may occur at the end as an Irremovable Attachment to the Given Name.
This is what happens invariably in Viet-Namese, Kannada, Malayalam,
Tamil and Telugu names. In these cases, if the words with a Compound
Given Name are written separately without a hyphen connecting them,
it will not be possible for the cataloguer to decide where the Entry Element
should begin and which of the Proper Nouns before the last one should be
taken with the Secondary Element.
In Viet-Namese, there is a tendency to insert the hyphen. But in Kannada,
Malayalam, Tamil, and Telugu names, there is the opposite tendency of
breaking a single fused word into its parts in violation of the Rules of Gram-
mar and putting them down as if they were separate words.
It is not easy even for a cataloguer bom within the cultural group to meet
this situation successfully. It is particularly so in the case of a Tamil name.
Because the word preceding the Given Name of the individual is usually
the Given Name of the father. These are similar. It will be very difficult
to decide where the father’s Given Name ends and where the son’s Given
Name begins.
15
225
CHAPTER HD
SPLIT GIVEN NAME
1 South India
Here are some examples of this tendency in Kannada, Malayalam, Tamil,
and Telugu Names.
The words in Capital and Small Capitals should be treated as a Single
Word denoting the Split Given Name specific to the individual. The words
in the Split Given Name taken together are to be used as Entry Element.
1 Pannambal Vishnu Murthi
2 Kasaxgode Yogesha Ananda Row
3 Candeth Siva Sankara Menon
4 Chcttur Visva Natha Nair
5 Rama Nathan Anantha Raman
6 Kalyana Raman Badari Narayanan
7 Ramu Mudaliar Bhima Sankaran
8 Kesava Pillai Desika Vinayagam
9 Umapathi Ganafathi Subramanian
10 Partha Sarathy Gopala Krishna
1 1 Panchapakesan Sankara Narayanan
12 Muthu Krishna Mudaliar Sankara Subramania Mudaliar
13 Sita Raman Satya Narayanan
14 Kesarimangalam Manikam Ayyar Siva Raman
15 Sundara Raman Siva Rama Krishnan
16 Siva Raman Siva Sankara Narayana
17 Duggirala Rama Krishna Row
18 Durba Subra Manian
It is difficult to make an exhaustive list of such split words constituting a
Given Name. For, it is not known what fused word will be split by a person
in his own Given Name or that of his father.
The first two are Kannada Names. The last two are Telugu Names.
The others are Tamil Names.
In 2, 3, 4, and 5, the last word is an Irremovable Attachment to the Given
Name. *
In 7, 8, and 12, the second word is an Irremovable Attachment to the
Given Name of the Father.
In 14, the third word is an Irremovable Attachment to the Given Name
of the Father.
2 Split Words Alone
In Punjabi and Hindi Names without a Family Name, there is often no
226
SrUT OtVBN NAME
HD4
proper noun other than the Given Name in a Split Form. IfonecanreGogniee
it as a Punjabi or Hindi Name» it wiH be easy to escape making dib second
word the Entry Element and the First Word the Secondary Etoent. But
it will not be possible for a foreign cataloguer to recognize the name as a
Puidibi or a Hindi one. It is conjectured that the total number of words
likely to occur as the second part of a split Given Name in Punjabi or Hindi
name will not exceed a few hundreds. But the number of the first of the
split words will be far more numerous. Therefore, if a fairly exhaustive list
of the second of the split words could be provided, it will help a foreign
cataloguer to recognize with its aid a Punjabi or a Hindi name and use it
merely as if it were an Irremovable Attachment to the preceding word.
3 Two-Worded Given Name in the
Islamic Names In India and Pakistan
An Islamic Name in India and Pakistan may have one of the following
words as Family Name:
Abidi
Hasani
Naqvi
Rizvi
Alavi
Hashimi
Qadiani
Sabzwari
Alvi
Husani
Qadri
Siddiqi
Bumie
Husaini
Qidwai
Shirani
Chishtie
Hussaini
Qizilbash
Shirwani
Chughtai
Jafri
Qadsi
Tirmazi
Durrani
Kidwai
Quraishi
Usmani
Farooqi
Nadvi
Qutbi
Zaidi
Faruqi
Naqavi
Rizavi
Zubalri
This is not an exhaustive list.
If a Family Name occurs at all, it occurs as the last proper noun. But it
occurs only in a comparatively few names. In most cases, there is only a
Two-Worded Given Name excluding any Irremovable Attachment, if any,
at the beginning or at the end. Of the two words in the Given Name, the
second is usually a word denoting God or the Prophet, or meaning “Religion”.
The first word is a common word — ^such as Asad (=Lion), Nur (—Light),
and Rahimat (—Grace). The result is a Two-Worded Given Name such as
Asad Ullab, Nur Elahi, and Rahimat ul-Islam. It is conjectured that the
total number of the words likely to occur as the second word in an Islamic
Given Name in India and Pakistan will be considerably smaller than the
number of the words likely to occur as the first word. Therefore if a fairly
exhaustive list of t{ie possible second words could be given, it will help a
foreign cataloguer to recognize with its aid an Islamic Name without a family
name and use it as if it were an Irremovable Attachment to the preceding
words.
4 Gujarathi and Marathi Given Name without Family Name
In a Gujarathi or Marathi name without a Family Name, the first proper
norm is the Given Name specific to the individual; and the second is the
227
HD4
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
Given Nmne specific to his father. The Entry Element should be the first of
the two Given Names. But it will not be easy for a foreign cataloguer to
recognize the name as a Gujarathi or a Marathi Name. Both the words in
the name are alike and are taken from the same group of words. The^ore,
the kind of help to a foreign cataloguer suggested in Sec HD2 and HD3 for
Hindi, Punjabi, and Islamic names cannot be given. The only way will be
to give an exhaustive list of such Two-Worded Names without a Family
Name, likely to occur in Author Headings and Subject Headings. But
their number is very great. Only a sample is given here. The Given Name
of the Individual is in Capitals and Small Capitals.
Anant Atmaram Ambalal Dinarakadas
Atmaram Kcsavji Jivanlal Ambalal
Kesavji Vishvanath Ballubhai Kahandas
ViSHVANATH Govindji Cheganlal Ballubhai
Edaui Jamshedji Narayan Hemachandra
Jamshedji Faramji Sankaranand Narayan
5 List of Second Words
The following is a combined list of the more important words likely to occur
as the second word in a Two-Worded Punjabi or Hindi Given Name or an
Islamic Given Name of India or Pakistan.
Abbas (Islamic)
Bhushan
Dutt
Afzal (Islamic)
Bandhu
Farooq (Islamic)
Ahmed (Islamic)
Bansh
Ganesh
Alam (Islamic)
Bari (Islamic)
Gopal
AH (Islamic)
Bashir (Islamic)
Govind
Allah (Islamic)
Behari
Haider (Islamic)
Anand
Bhan
Halecm (Islamic)
Aziz (Islamic)
Chand
Hameed (Islamic)
Anant
Chandra
Hanif (Islamic)
Askari (Islamic)
Charan
Haq (Islamic)
Asre
Das
Haque (Islamic)
Autar
Dayal
Hari
Ayyub (Islamic)
Deo
Hasan (Islamic)
Azhar (Islamic)
Dev
Husvn (Islamic)
Babu
Devi
Idris (Islamic)
Badan
Dhar
Iqbal (Islamic)
Bahadur
Dhawan
Is-haq (Islamic)
Bai
Din
Islam (Islamic)
Bala
Din (Islamic)
Ismail (Islamic)
Ballabh
Dular
Jabbar (Islamic)
Bhanu
Dulare
Jalil (Islamic)
Bhuj
Dulari
Jit
228
SPLIT GIVEN NAKE
HD5
Jiwan
Katnini
Kant •
Kan^
Kanti
Karan
Kaur
Kaushal
Kishan
Kishore
Kishori
Krishna
Kumar
Kumari
Lai
Lakhan
Lata
Laxman
Majid (Islamic)
Mai
Malik (Islamic)
Mohan
Mohini
Mukhtar (Islamic)
Muni
Murari
Murti
Mushtaq (Islamic)
Mustafa (Islamic)
Nabi (Islamic)
Nand
Nandan
Handdini
Narain
Naresh
Nath
Nazir (Islamic)
Nivas
Pal
Pati
Phool
Prabha
Prakash
Prasad
Pratap
Pyari
Qadir (Islamic)
Qayyum (Islamic)
Rahq (Islamic)
Rahim (Islamic)
Rahman (Islamic)
Rai
Raj
Ram
Raman
Rani
Ranjan
Raoof (Islamic)
Rashid (Islamic)
Rasool (Islamic)
Ratan
Raza (Islamic)
Rezzaq (Islamic)
Roshan
Sagar
Sahai
Salam (Islamic)
Sanehi
Saran
Sarup
Sen
Sewak
Shah (Islamic)
Shamim (Islamic)
Shanker
Shekar
Shiv
Shyam
Singh
Suleman (Islamic)
Sunder
Swarup
Umar (Islamic)
Vallabh
Vanti
Vati
Vilas
Vinayak
Vir
Yagya
Yahya
Yunus (Islamic)
Yaqub (Islamic)
Yusuf (Islamic)
Zaki (Islamic)
229
CHAPTER HE
FORMS OF NAME-OF-PERSON
The following terms correspond to the different stages in the successive
reduction of a Name-of-Person to the form in which it is finally entered in the
the Heading of an Entry.
1 Usage Name. — Name-of-Person used in denoting a person
for public purposes.
The Usage Name will contain a Given Name in one or more words. It
may also contain a Family Name in one or more words, an Irremovable
Attachment at the beginning or at the end, a Removable Attachment at the
beginning, the middle, or the end and an Irremovable Auxiliary Word between
the Given Name and the Family Name.
2 Title-Page Name. — Name-of-Person as it occurs on the
Title-Page of the document.
The Title-Page name also may present the various kinds of Removable or
Irremovable attachment, and Irremovable Auxiliary Word, and Family
Name along with the Given Name, even as the Usage Name may do. But
it has usually less of Removable Attachment.
3 Full Name.— Usage Name or Title-Page Name as the case
may be.
Full Name is the starting point in the reduction of a Name-of-Person.
In an Author-Entry, Title-Page name will be the starting point, for arriving
at the form in which the name is to be entered in the Heading of an Entry.
In a Subject Entry which has the name of a Non-Author as the Heading the
Usage Name will be the starting point. „
4 Pure Name. — Name derived from Full Name by removing
all the Removable Attachments, if any.
A Removable Attachment will be a common noun or an honorific word
depending on the cultural group to which the Name-of-Person belongs. The
table given in Sec HB341 will be of help in deriving the Pure Name from the
Full Name in the case of Indian, Ceylonese, Indonesian , Malayan, and Viet-
230
FORMS OF NAME-OF-PERSON HE5I
Namese names. Similar tables should be constructed for oth^ cultural
groups. Words denoting academic qualifications, office held, and civil or
military decorations are removable attachments.
%
5 Reduced Name* — Name derived from Pure Name by
temporarily coupling together with a hyphen the components of a
Compound or multi-worded Given Name or Family Name, if
any, if they are not already coupled together by a hyphen or an
auxiliary word, and coupling the irremovable attachment at the
end if any, with the preceding word or compound word as the case
may be.
Any auxiliary word between the Family Name and the Given Name is to
be temporarily linked by hyphen to one or other of them according to the
practice in the cultural group.
The coupling is to be done only temporarily to facilitate further work.
The tables given in Sec HC2, HC3 and HC4 will be of use in recognizing
Compound Family Names. With regard to inseparable Two-Worded and
artificially Split Given Names, the list given in Sec HD4 and HD5 will be of
help.
Auxiliary Word
The following table gives some of the conventions prevailing in regard t&
the attachment of the Auxiliary Word occurring between the Family Name
and Given Name in Western names. In column 3, the Family Name is
printed in capitals and small capitals. The auxiliary word to be attached to
the Family Name is in small caps; while the auxiliary word to be attached to
the Given Name is in Roman smalls.
Language
Auxiliary Word to be Attached to
Example
Danish
1 Family Name, if of romance origin
and the auxiliary consists of or con-
tains and article
2 Given Name if the auxiliary is av, af
or von
Jans Lessen la
COUR
Carl von Linne
Dutch
Given Name
Jan ten Brink
English
Family Name
John DE Morgan
French
1 Family Name if the auxiliary consists
of or contains an article
2 Given Name if the auxiliary is a pre-
position
Jean de la Fontaine
Eugene de Faye
231
HE51
CLASSniED CATALOGUE CODE
Language
Auxiliary Word to be Attached to
Example
German
Given Name
Peter von der<^UHLL
Italian
1 Family Name if auxiliary is an article
2 Given Name if auxiliary is or contains
Antonio degli Al-
a preposition
berti
Norwegian
Same as in Danish
Swedish
1 Family Name, if of romance origin
2 Same as in Danish
Magnus Gabriel de
LA Gardie
6 I^itry Element. — In the case of a Name-of-Person, other
than Chinese, the Entry Element, is to consist of the last word or
the last coupled word-group in the Reduced Name. If Chinese,
the entire Pure Name, without any change in the sequence of its
words, is to be the Entry Element.
7 Secmidary Element. — In the case of a Name-of-Person,
other than Chinese, the Secondary Element is to consist of all the
words of the Reduced Name, not included in the Entry Element.
8 Entry Name. — Entry Element followed by the Secondary
element, if any, in a Name-of-Person, with all the temporary
hyphens removed.
232
CHAPTER HF
ARABIC NAME
0 Word Groups
An Arabic name may consist of one or more groups of words representing
respectively;
1 Conventional or professional title or laqab;
2 The personal name or ism:
21 The name of the father or the brother of the author preceded by the
word “Ibn” or “Bin” or “B” and “Akhu” respectively;
22 A succession of the names of grandfather, great grandfather, etc,
each name being preceded by “Ibn” or its variants;
3 The paternal or matronymical name or kunyah^ usually beginning
with the word “Abu”;
4 The conferred title or laqab;
5 The nickname or urf;
6 The relative name or nisbah usually eding in i or y:
1 The literary name or takhallus^ usually of one or two syllables only;
and
71 The “familiar name’ or the name by which the person is generally
referred to by the public and in books, such a name being usually preceded
by the words ^'almaruf ba'\ or ^'asaheer^\ if it is given on the title page.
These groups of words generally, but not in all cases, come in the sequence
indicated above; but it is not to be understood that all the groups will neces-
sarily occur in all the names.
The Kunyah is an indirect name. Normally it consists of the word ‘Abu*
meaning ‘father of* followed by the name of the eldest son or daughter; but
there ate many exceptions. Certain Kunyahs go regularly with certain names
owing to the first owner of the name having had that Kunyah, Again, Kunyahs
are given to infants and to persons without children. Hence, wc cannot
infer from the Kunyah the existence of a child bearing the name which follows
the word ‘Abu*. In some cases, the Kunyah does not at all express paternity.
It may express some other characteristic. While the normal position of the
Kunyah is after the name of the father and the names of other ancestors,
occasionally it is also placed at the beginning before the personal name.
In such cases it will not be difficult to identify the Kunyah part of the name.
The conventional title occurring at the beginning may be invariably re-
moved from the Heading in an Entry, for example Hakim, Qazi, Moulvi,
Aga, Habib, Khaga, Mir, Sirdar and Syed. But care must be taken to see
that it does not constitute the Given Name. This will not be easy for a foreign
cataloguer.
233
HF2
CLASSIFIED CATALOGUE CODE
2 Entry Element: Ism
The Given Name or Ism will usually consist of one or two words and in
rare cases of more than two words. A rough test to spot out the«»Given
Name is this. If the word Tbn’ or its equivalent or ‘Akhu’ occurs in the
Pure Name, it may be taken that the word immediately before the first Tbn’
is the Given Name and the word after the first Tbn’ or ‘Akhu’ is the father’s
name or the brother’s name respectively. In such a case, the group of words
consisting of
1 Given Name; and
2 The word Tbn’ or its equivalent and the father’s name ; or
3 The word ‘Akhu’ and the brother’s name;
form the Entry Element.
The groups 2 and 3 form an Irremovable Attachment to the Given Name.
If there is no ‘Ibn’ or ‘Akhu’ in the name, the first word (or two) in the Pure
Name is (are) likely to constitute the Given Name; and it forms the Entry
Element.
21 Kunyah as Entry Element
In certain cases, the Kunyah may be the only name known, the ‘Ism’ or
the Given Name having never been conferred or having been forgotten.
In such a case, the Kunyah is to be the Entry Element.
3 Secondary Element: Kunyah
In the heading in a catalogue, the Kunyah, if it occurs as part of the name,
is to be included in the Secondary Element.
4 Conferred Title: Laqab
The Laqab may be defined negatively as a name other than that which the
holder received at birth and yet not substituted for it.
The conferred title or Laqab is to be omitted.
5 Nick>Name: Uif
The nickname or Vrf is to be used, if at all, as an Alternative Name or as a
Pseudonym.
6 Individualising Element: Nlsboh
The Nisbah is an adjective which locates the person to whom it is given,
as a member of a tribe, as a resident of some place, as one following some
trade or in any other way. It can be identified by the fact that it usually
ends in T*’ or ‘y’. It is not unusual to find two or more Nisbahs as part of the
same name. The Nisbah is to be treated as an Individualising Element*
234
ARABIC NAME
7 Pseudonym: TakhaHos
HF91
The Takh^llus is the literary name which most men of letters assume. It
is a ps^donym. An author usually puts this pseudonym at the end of his
real name. But others refer to him only by his pseudonym. The Takhallus
can be easily identified by the fact that it comes at the end of the real name
and by remembering that it is usually of one or two syllables only. It has
to be dealt with in accordance with Rule MD42, if it occum along with the
real name, or in accordance with Rule MD41 and its subdivisions if it occurs
alone on the title-page.
71 Pseudonym: Familiar Name
The Tamiliar Name’, or the name by which the person is generally referred
to by the public and in books, is a source of some difficulty. In the books
written by the author himself and in such of their editions as he himself is
responsible for, his ‘Familiar Name* will not ordinarily be found on the
title-page. But in later editions brou^t out by others, it may happen that
the title-page contains the ‘Familiar name’ alone. This too is a pseudonym.
8 Definite Article
The definite article M/’ and its variants may occur before one or more words
in a name. Wherever it occurs, it is to be written, but ignored in alphabetisa-
tion. If it occurs in the Nisbah it is to be underlined. Can we not omit it
altogether ?
91 Appeal
It is no easy matter for cataloguers without a special knowledge of Arabic
culture to deal with names of such complexity. Linderfelt’s Eclectic card
catalogue rules is said to contain definite instructions on the subject. But
1 have not had access to a copy of that book. Generally the volumes of the
British Museum catalogue dealing with books in Muslim languages and the
entries in the Encyclopaedia of Islam will be of help in deciding the signi-
ficance and the sequence of the words in Arabic Names. It must be stated
that there is still room for systematisation. There is scope for research in
Arabic Names. In addition to the intrinsic complexity of such names, there
seem to be also some special features characterising Muslim names of different
nationalities such as Spanish, Moorish, Turkish, Egyptian, Arabic, Persian,
Afghan, and Indian. The whole problem is bristling with difficulties and
uncertainties. The present practice in libraries can at best be described as
‘drifting’. The Aligarh University will be doing a great service, if it would
set some young men on the investigation and systematisation of this problem
and publish an authoritative direction for the rendering of Muslim names.
235
CHAPTER HG
ILLUSION AND SOLUTION
* 1 Illusory Solution
Though the terminology and prescription in Chap HE and HF in regard to
Name-of-Person, taken along with the auxiliary tables given in Chap HE,
HC, and HD appear to be over-elaborate, in fact, they are over-simplified.
It is doubtful whether a cataloguer, who is not intimately familiar with the
social practices connected with the formation of a Name-of-Person in a
cultural group, can successfully and consistently pick out the Entiy Element
and the Secondary Element respectively. The individual variations — one
may almost say idiosyncrasies— in making up one’s own name may baffle
even a cataloguer bom in the same cultural group, A word may be split
into two unmeaning parts. A common noun which is only an attachment
may be used as if it were a proper noun denoting either a given Name or a
Family Name. The greater the deviation of the cultural group of the cata-
loguer from that of a Name-of-Person, the greater will be the uncertainty.
2 Cultural Groups in Exhaustion
Till now, cataloguing involved only the names of a few cultural groups
in most of the libraries. This was the result of nearly two-thirds of the
people of the world being in a state of cultural exhaustion, producing few
books, and consuming even fewer books by authors belonging to other
cultural groups. Therefore the problem of rendering a Name-of-Person
has been dealt with in a more or less light-hearted way, and there has been
only a small percentage of deviations from the correct rendering. But
today practically all the cultural communities of the world are entering into
the ascending phase of their current cultural cycles.
3 Creative Activity Everywhere
Creative activity has begun everywhere in the world. New thought is
being created by the reviving cultural groups. They cannot be ignored
by any other cultural group. The reviving cultural groups are also keen to
have access to documents published in every part of the world. Modern
transport conditions permit a free circulation of documents throughout the
world, whatever be the cultural group of their origin. The consciousness
of one world, being helped by international bodies such as the United Nations
and its Specialised Agencies, is intensifying this desire on the part of every
cultural group of the world to use documents produced in every other cultural
group.
236
ILLUSION AND SOLUTION
4 CoBfermtioii of Research Potential
HG5
Moreover, the unbalancing between population pressure and the availa-
bility of natural and near-natural commodities makes it imperative that the
r^carcl^potential of the world should be conserved, without any wastage
due to any unwanted repetition of one and the same piece of investigation*
This requires that any document on nascent thought produced in any cultural
group whatever should be served unerringly to the workers in every other
cultural group. In this process, the rendering of Name-of-Person will play
a very important part. The impracticability of any one cutlural group to
render the Names-of-Persons of all other cultural groups will lead to ineffi-
ciency of service. Ultimately such an inefficiency of service will be traceable
to the insolubility of the problem of Name-of-Person by cataloguing rules,
however involved and however clever. Solution of the problem of rendering
Names-of-Persons on a world-scale through a number of cataloguing rules is
only an illusion.
5 The Right Solution
The one person who knows the Entry Element and the Secondary Element
in a Name-of-Person is the person himself. International economy and
efficiency in cataloguing requires that the author should indicate in his docu-
ments the Entry Element and the Secondary Element in his name, along the
lines laid down in the Indian Standard IS : 792-1962 Specification for title
page and hack of title page of a book. This is to be printed at the back of the
title-page of a book or in a suitable place in any other kind of document.
If this is done, the rule on the rendering of a Name-of-Person need not be
anything more than Sec JAl. With this single rule it will be more easy to
secure accuracy and consistency in rendering a Name-of-Person than with the
plethora of rules crowding cataloguing codes at present. This appears to be
the only right solution.
237
PART J
RENDERING OF NAMES